Technical Service Manual

Technical Service Manual
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
Technical
Service
Manual
Part Number: S002013
Rev: V
Date: 20 May 2002
© 2002 Draeger Medical, Inc.
Narkomed 3
Anesthesia System
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
Narkomed 3 Service Manual Table of Contents
Summary of What's New in Rev. B
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
SECTION 1:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2:
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Service Selection Screen
2.2
Configuration Screen . .
2.3
Service Data Screen . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
SECTION 3:
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
Power Supply and Voltage Distribution
3.2
Multispec Analyzer Power Supply . . . .
3.3
Troubleshooting Guide Flow Charts . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-4
3-5
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Yoke Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Pressure Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Cutoff Valves (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Supply Pressure Failure Protection Device .
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada) . .
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vaporizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience Outlet AC Power Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Bellows Valve and Guide Assembly . . . . .
Alarm Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECC (Serial Interface) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sphygmomed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC (Central Communications Controller) Assembly
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-1
. 4-2
. 4-5
. 4-9
4-12
4-16
4-20
4-23
4-26
4-29
4-31
4-37
4-40
4-44
4-47
4-50
4-53
4-56
4-66
4-69
4-77
4-79
4-82
4-85
4-88
SECTION 4:
Replacement
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
Rev. P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued)
NM3
DESCRIPTION
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.29
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.36
4.37
PAGE
CRT Asemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Oximeter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spiromed Respiratory Volume Sensor . . . . .
Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Sphygmomanometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION 5:
Adjustment and Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment (except CO2) . . . . . . . . . .
5.1A CO2 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
Oxygen Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
Baromed Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
Multispec Analyzer Calibration and Flowrate Adjustment . . . . . . .
5.6A Multispec 4610 Analyzer Calibration and Flowrate Adjustment . . .
5.7
CRT Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
Vaporizer Interlock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9
Vaporizer Select Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Capnomed (B) Barometric Pressure Adjustment for High Altitudes
5.11 Capnomed Span Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 5-1
. . 5-2
. . 5-4
. . 5-5
. . 5-8
. 5-12
. 5-15
. 5-17
5-23A
. 5-24
. 5-27
. 5-29
. 5-31
. 5-34
SECTION 6:
PMS Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
Manual Sphygmomanometer . . . . . . . . .
6.2
Yoke Assemblies and Gauges . . . . . . . . .
6.3
High Pressure Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm . . . . . . .
6.5
Oxygen Supply Failure Protection . . . . .
6.6
O2Med Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7
O2Med Calibration, Accuracy and Alarms
6.8
Oxygen Concentration Test . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
Flowmeter Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Freshgas Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Repack MAN/AUTO Selector Valve . . . .
6.12 Absorber System Inspection . . . . . . . . . .
6.13 Lubrication, Spiromed Sensor . . . . . . . .
6.14 Breathing System Leak Test . . . . . . . . .
6.15 Absorber Flow Direction and Leak Test .
6.16 APL Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
Test
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-91
4-94
4-97
4-99
4-101
4-103
4-105
4-107
4-110
4-112
4-114
4-116
4-118
. 6-1
. 6-2
. 6-3
. 6-5
. 6-8
. 6-9
6-12
6-12
6-14
6-16
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-23
6-25
Rev. T
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
CONTENTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
6.25
6.26
6.27
6.28
6.29
6.30
6.31
6.32
6.33
6.34
6.35
6.36
6.36A
6.37
6.38
6.39
6.40
6.41
6.42
6.43
6.44
6.45
6.46
6.47
PAGE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 6-25
. 6-26
. 6-29
. 6-29
. 6-30
. 6-30
. 6-31
. 6-32
. 6-33
. 6-35
. 6-36
. 6-37
. 6-37
. 6-37
. 6-38
. 6-40
. 6-43
. 6-45
. 6-47
. 6-48
6-49A
. 6-50
. 6-53
. 6-54
. 6-58
. 6-58
. 6-59
. 6-60
. 6-60
. 6-61
. 6-62
. 6-62
SECTION 7:
Software Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
Monitors Firmware Replacement (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
CCC Assembly Firmware Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
Trend Assembly Firmware Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
ECC (Serial Interface) Module Firmware Replacement . . . .
7.5
CRT Assembly (Typical) Firmware Replacement . . . . . . . .
7.6
Gas Analyzer Interface PCB (4610) Firmware Replacement
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Rev. P
PEEP Bypass Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Relief Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bellows Drive Gas Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bellows PEEP Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Limit Control Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spiromed Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Circuit Delay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BAROMED Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuing Pressure Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Pressure Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sub-Atmospheric Pressure Alarm . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Ratio Monitor Control Test . . . . . . . .
Scavenger Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scavenger, A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sphygmomed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nellcor O2SatMed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Novametrix O2SatMed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capnomed CO2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vapor Exclusion System and Indicator Lamps
Multispec Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Attachments and Visual Inspection
Battery Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Flush Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 7-1
. 7-2
. 7-4
. 7-6
. 7-8
7-10
7-12
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued)
NM3
SECTION 8:
Spare and Replacement Parts
ASSEMBLY/PART
PAGE
Monitor Chassis, Monitors, CCC, Trend/MUX, CRT Assemblies . .
Front Bezel Assembly, Serial Interface Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, incl. PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Sphygmomed Module, Pulse Oximeter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Inlet, Failsafe, Alarm Channel Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . .
ORMC, Vaporizer Select Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tubes, Gauges, Flow Control Valves, Alarm Channel Items
Yoke, Regulator, Flush Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Panels, Power Supply Assemblies, Casters . . . . . . . . . .
Absorber Assembly, Breathing Pressure Hoses, Oxygen Sensor . .
Man/Auto Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Man/Auto Selector Valve (Later Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reservoir Scavenger, old style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/C Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 8-2, 8-3
. 8-4, 8-5
. 8-6, 8-7
. 8-8, 8-9
8-10, 8-11
8-12, 8-13
8-14, 8-15
8-16, 8-17
8-18, 8-19
8-20, 8-21
8-22, 8-23
8-24, 8-25
8-26, 8-27
8-28, 8-29
8-30, 8-31
8-32, 8-33
8-34, 8-35
8-36, 8-37
8-38, 8-39
Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NARKOMED 3 ANESTHESIA SYSTEM
BOOM ARM
ALARM AND DATA
DISPLAY SCREENS
SYSTEM
CONTROL
KEYPAD
PATIENT
INTERFACE
PANEL
MONITORS
MANUAL
SPHYGMOMANOMETER
(OPTIONAL)
BREATHING SYSTEM
SENSOR INTERFACE
PANEL
SV30101
1-0
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
INTRODUCTION
1.0 Recommendations
Because of the sophisticated nature of Draeger Medical, Inc. anesthesia equipment and its critical
importance in the operating room setting, it is highly recommended that only appropriately
trained and experienced professionals be permitted to service and maintain this equipment.
Please contact DrägerService® at (800) 543-5047 for service of this equipment.
Draeger Medical, Inc. also recommends that its anesthesia equipment be serviced at three-month
intervals. Periodic Manufacturer’s Service Agreements are available for equipment manufactured
by Draeger Medical, Inc. For further information concerning these agreements, please contact us
at (800) 543-5047.
Draeger Medical, Inc. products/material in need of factory repair shall be sent to:
DrägerService
3124 Commerce Drive
Telford, PA 18969
(Include RMA Number)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The manual is divided into several sections. The DIAGNOSTICS section describes self-test and
service diagnostics for checking the system functions. An understanding of the on-board service
capabilities is necessary before any attempt is made to troubleshoot the unit. The
TROUBLESHOOTING section lists error codes and provides troubleshooting guides to assist the
TSR in locating the source of a problem. The REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES section contains
instructions for removal and replacement of the assemblies that are considered field-replaceable.
The ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES section contains the field procedures
needed to restore original system specifications. The Periodic Manufacturer’s Service (PMS)
PROCEDURE section outlines the steps required to verify the electrical, mechanical and
pneumatic safety of the unit and also identifies components requiring periodic replacement.
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES
Troubleshooting the Narkomed 3 should always begin by communicating with those who observed
or experienced a problem with the unit. This may eliminate unnecessary troubleshooting steps.
Once a general problem is identified, refer to the troubleshooting flow charts in Section 3 to
determine the proper corrective action to be taken.
After a component has been replaced, verify that the unit is operating properly by running the
appropriate diagnostic procedure. The PMS PROCEDURE in Section 6 must also be performed
after any component has been replaced.
The general arrangement of the Narkomed 3 Anesthesia System is shown on the opposite page.
WARNINGS are used in this manual before procedures which if not performed correctly could
result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS are used in this manual to alert service personnel to the possibility of damage to the
equipment if a procedure is not performed correctly.
Rev. H
1-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
NM3
Copyright
Copyright © 1997 by Draeger Medical, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, or stored in a retrieval system in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the
written permission of Draeger Medical, Inc.
Trademark Notices
CliniDAS, Datagrip, NAD Information Systems, NAD Logo, Narkomed, O.R. Data Manager,
O.R. Link, ORM, PC Prep/View, Quality Service For Life, Vigilance Audit, Vitalert, Vitalink
and Narkomed GS are registered trademarks of Draeger Medical, Inc. All other products or
name brands are trademarks of their respective owners.
Disclaimer
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change
without notice. Draeger Medical, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
1-2
Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
DIAGNOSTICS
2.0 DIAGNOSTICS
When the Narkomed 3 is powered up, each of the monitors performs a six-second selfdiagnostic check and lamp test. The display window on each monitor should show a power-up
code number, and all LED indicators and backlit labels should illuminate. The left-hand CRT
will then show the Centralert Alarm display and the right-hand CRT will show the Data
display.
Table 2-1 lists the possible error codes that may appear in monitor display windows at powerup or during subsequent use. Record any error codes that appear and communicate them to
the NAD Service Department, or Authorized Service center during any troubleshooting effort.
Following the completion of the monitor self-tests, the Technical Service Representative (TSR)
can call up service screens at the display panel. The following paragraphs describe each
service screen. If no display is present on the Centralert Alarm CRT or the Data CRT, refer
to Section 3 of this manual for troubleshooting assistance.
TABLE 2-1: NARKOMED 3 ERROR CODES
ERROR CODE
E00
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E08
E09
E10
DESCRIPTION
ROM error
RAM error
ADC did not start conversion
ADC conversion too long
ADC reading out of range (overflow)
CTC error
Calibration error
Communication lost
Shorted switch (switch closed for >30 seconds)
Non-functional pneumatic control element
ADC reference out of range
2-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.1
NM3
Service Selection Screen
To access the Service Selection Screen, press and hold the LOG DATA key and
the hidden key directly to the right of the LOG DATA key, then press the
CHECKOUT key. The Service Selection screen appears as shown in Figure 2-1.
The Service Selection Screen displays the available service functions. Access
to these service functions is gained through the Centralert CRT control keys
below the service screen which temporarily function according to their
corresponding on-screen labels. The SELECT key advances the cursor to the
desired menu option, and the ENTER key opens the selected service screen.
Pressing the END CONFIGURE key exits the Service Selection Screen. This
screen also exits automatically after two minutes have elapsed.
> CONFIGURE DEFAULTS
> SERVICE DATA
SELECT
END
CONFIGURE
ENTER
Figure 2-1: SERVICE SELECTION SCREEN
2-2
Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
2.2
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Configuration Screen
To access the Configuration Screen, press the SELECT key (see Figure 2-1) to
advance the cursor to the CONFIGURE DEFAULTS option, and then press the
ENTER key. Figure 2-2 shows the Configuration Screen.
This screen allows the TSR to set power-up default alarm limits and display
selections for each monitor in the machine. The default values are stored with
the SAVE key. Press the END CONFIGURE key to return to the Service
Selection Screen. The Configuration Screen also exits automatically after two
minutes have elapsed.
USING THE MONITOR FRONT PANELS SELECT
THE DEFAULT DISPLAYS AND ALARM LIMITS
THEN PRESS THE SAVE KEY.
END
CONFIGURE
SAVE
Figure 2-2: CONFIGURATION SCREEN
2-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.3
NM3
Service Data Screen
To access the Service Data Screen, press the SELECT key (see Figure 2-1) to
advance the cursor to the SERVICE DATA option, and then press the ENTER
key. This screen allows the TSR to view and reset the last service date and
shows the total number of hours of machine usage. It also displays the
software versions of the system subassemblies. A typical Service Data Screen
is shown in Figure 2-3.
The Hours Since Serviced and Service Date are reset by pressing the RESET
key. Pressing the END CONFIGURE key returns the TSR to the Service
Selection Screen.
LAST SERVICE DATE:
HOURS SINCE SERVICED:
TOTAL HOURS:
CO2/AGT
O2MED
OXIMETER
SPIROMED
SPHYGMOMED
BAROMED
CCC
ECC
ALARMS CRT
8-AUG-91
00002.0
00111.0
VER 1.03
VER 1.04
VER 1.07
VER 1.04
VER 2.05
VER 1.06
VER 1.08
VER 1.03
VER 2.02
RESET
Figure 2-3: SERVICE DATA SCREEN
2-4
END
CONFIGURE
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
3.0
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains information to assist the Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified
Technical Service Representative (TSR) in locating electrical faults affecting the
NARKOMED 3 monitoring and display devices. Since most troubleshooting efforts
begin with verifying power supply voltages, the following paragraphs outline the
voltage distribution scheme within the machine along with connector pin identification
and wire colors.
Also contained in this section are troubleshooting guide flow charts that provide a
method of tracing faults to specific field replaceable assemblies or sub-assemblies in
response to observed failure modes or symptoms.
3.1
Power Supply and Voltage Distribution
In the NARKOMED 3, power for the monitors and CRT displays is distributed
from a terminal block located in the rear of the monitor housing. This terminal
block is accessible by opening the back cover of the monitor housing. Figure 3-1
shows the terminal block inputs and main DC power wiring harness
connections to the power controller PCB assembly.
Table 3-1 shows the nominal DC voltages at the power distribution block and
their acceptable tolerances , under normal load with rated AC voltage applied
to the machine and the System Power switch set to ON.
Table 3-1: DISTRIBUTION BLOCK VOLTAGES
WIRE
COLOR
NOMINAL VOLTAGE WITH
RESPECT TO COMMON
ACCEPTABLE
RANGE
Gray
+7.4 Unswitched Memory Backup
+7.1 to +7.7
Purple
-8 Vital
-7.75 to -8.25
Yellow
+12 Non-Vital
+11.7 to +12.3
Orange
+8 Non-Vital
+7.75 to +8.25
+8 Vital
+7.75 to +8.25
Red
Figure 3-2 shows the power distribution from the terminal block to the field
replaceable assemblies and CRTs, and also to the backplanes which provide
power distribution to the monitors.
Rev. F
3-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26
+7.4 V
-8 V
+12 V NV
+8 V NV
+8 V VITAL
COMMON
GND
VIO
YEL
BLK
BLK
RED
GRN/YEL
5 6 7 8
RED
3 4
ORN
1 2
GRY
POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCK
IN MONITOR HOUSING
POWER CONTROLLER
PCB ASSEMBLY
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J5-1
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
COM
BLK
+8 VITAL
RED
+7.4
GRY
-8
VIO
COM
BLK
+8
ORN
+8 VITAL
RED
+12
YEL
GRN/YEL
SV30001
GND
Figure 3-1: INPUTS TO POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
3-2
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
BACKPLANES
BLK
RED
+8 VITAL
+8 VITAL
RED
BLK
COM
+7.4
GRY
YEL
+12
-8
VIO
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
COM
BLK
+8 VITAL
RED
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
+7.4
GRY
-8
VIO
J5-4
J3-1
J3-2
DATA CRT
COM
COM
BLK
+8
ORN
J5-2
J5-3
+8 VITAL
BLK
+12
YEL
+8 VITAL
RED
COM
BLK
J10-2
CCC
ASSEMBLY
+8 VITAL
BLK
COM
YEL
+12
3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26
-8 V
+12 V NV
+8 V NV
+8 V VITAL
COMMON
GND
J1-1
COM
BLK
+8
ORG
J1-2
SPHYGMOMED
MODULE
J2-1
J2-2
SV30004
J5-3
RED
1 2
TREND
ASSEMBLY
J10-1
J5-2
+7.4 V
RED
COM
J5-1
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
GND
SERIAL INTERFACE
(ECC MODULE)
J5-1
ALARM CRT
+8 VITAL
RED
COM
BLK
PULSE OXIMETER MODULE
Figure 3-2: POWER DISTRIBUTION - NM3 MONITOR HOUSING
3-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
3.2
NM3
Multispec Analyzer Power Supply
The multispec analyzer is powered by a separate supply located in the
secondary power supply compartment directly above the power controller PCB
assembly. Table 3-2 lists the nominal DC voltages at the output connector on
the multispec power supply and their acceptable tolerances, under normal load
with rated AC voltage applied to the machine and the System Power switch set
to ON.
Table 3-2: MULTISPEC POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES
CONNECTOR
AND PIN
NOMINAL
VOLTAGE
ACCEPTABLE
RANGE
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
+5 VDC
J2-4
+4.88 to +5.12
J2-5
J2-6
+5 V return
J2-7
J2-8
J2-9
+15 VDC
J2-10
+14.66 to +15.34
J2-11
J2-12
+15 V return
J2-13
-15 V return
J2-14
-15 VDC
3-4
-14.09 to -15.91
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
3.3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
Troubleshooting Guide Flow Charts
Table 3-3 lists several common possible failure modes and symptoms (excluding
simultaneous multiple faults) for the monitoring devices in the NARKOMED
3. Each failure mode or symptom is keyed to a troubleshooting guide flow chart
to assist the Technical Service Representative in locating a problem. These
flow charts assume that the machine is plugged into an AC outlet with the
correct voltage, and the machine is not running on its backup battery.
Table 3-3: NARKOMED 3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES
FAILURE MODE / SYMPTOM
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CRT Screen Blank or Incorrect Display
Guide 1
O2MED Monitor Inoperative
Guide 2
BAROMED Monitor Inoperative
Guide 3
SaO2 Monitor Inoperative
Guide 4
SPIROMED Monitor Inoperative
Guide 5
SPHYGMOMED Monitor Inoperative
Guide 6
MULTISPEC Monitor and Analyzer Errors
Guide 7
Serial Interface Communication Failure
Guide 8
Loss of Keypad Response
Guide 9
3-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
GUIDE 1: CRT Screen Blank or Incorrect Display
START
CRT
SCREEN
BLANK?
N
IS
DISPLAY
CORRECT?
Y
CONNECT ALL
CRT ASM
CABLES
ALL CRT ASM
CABLES PLUGGED IN
AT BOTH ENDS?
N
N
REPLACE
TREND ASM
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.23
Y
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
N
VOLTAGE
PRESENT AT J5 ON
CRT?
IS
DISPLAY
CORRECT?
Y
REPLACE CRT ASM
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.25
CRT
SCREEN
BLANK?
Y
Y
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
TREND ASM
-------------------------------REPLACE CCC ASM
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.24
N
Y
IS
DISPLAY
CORRECT?
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL
CRT ASM
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CCC ASM
N
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-6
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 2: O2MED Monitor Inoperative
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
"O2MED ERR"
OR "O2 CAL" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
Y
Y
N
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
N
N
CHECK EXTERNAL
AND INTERNAL
SENSOR CABLE
CONNECTIONS;
PERFORM CAL
PROCEDURE
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
Y
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
Y
ERROR CODE
IN MONITOR DISPLAY
WINDOW?
N
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
Y
N
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-7
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
GUIDE 3: BAROMED Monitor Inoperative
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
Y
ERROR CODE
IN MONITOR WINDOW
OR "BAROMED ERR" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
N
ERRONEOUS OR
UNSTABLE READINGS?
Y
N
Y
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
N
CHECK EXTERNAL
AND INTERNAL
SENSOR LINES AND
CONNECTIONS
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
Y
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
Y
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
N
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
N
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-8
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 4: SaO2 Monitor Inoperative
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
ERROR CODE IN
MONITOR WINDOW,
"O2SATMED ERR" OR
"OXIMETER ERR" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
Y
"OXI DISC",
"OXI ALRM OFF" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
CHECK CABLE
FROM OXIMETER
MODULE TO
MONITOR
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
CHECK EXTERNAL AND
INTERNAL SENSOR
CABLE CONNECTIONS
Y
N
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
IS MONITOR
INPUT CABLE
CONNECTED?
ERRATIC
READINGS?
N
Y
Y
CHECK SENSOR
APPLICATION /
REPLACE SENSOR
Y
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
ERRATIC
READINGS?
N
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
CHECK OXIMETER
CONNECTIONS / REPLACE
OXIMETER MODULE
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.27
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
OXIMETER MODULE
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-9
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
GUIDE 5: SPIROMED Monitor Inoperative
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
ERROR CODE
IN MONITOR WINDOW
OR "SPIROMED ERR" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
Y
"VOL SEN DISC"
MSG ON ALARM
CRT?
N
Y
N
Y
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
N
CHECK
SENSOR CORD
AND INTERNAL
CONNECTIONS
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
Y
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
N
Y
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
N
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-10
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 6: SPHYGMOMED Monitor Inoperative
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
N
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
ERROR CODE IN
MONITOR WINDOW,
"SPHYGMOM ERR" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
Y
N
Y
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
N
Y
CHECK CABLE
FROM
SPHYGMOMED
MODULE TO
MONITOR
CHECK CUFF
APPLICATION,
CUFF TUBING,
INTERNAL TUBING
Y
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
N
BP ERROR
INDICATOR, "BP CUFF
DISC" OR "BP CUFF ERR" MSG
ON ALARM CRT?
N
IS MONITOR
INPUT CABLE
CONNECTED?
DOES
CUFF INFLATE
PROPERLY?
Y
Y
N
Y
REPLACE
SPHYGMOMED
MODULE
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.21
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
N
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
Y
Y
DOES
CUFF INFLATE
PROPERLY?
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
N
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
SPHYGMOMED MODULE
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-11
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
GUIDE 7: MULTISPEC Monitor and Analyzer Errors
START
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
PLUG MONITOR
FIRMLY INTO
BACKPLANE
Y
ERROR CODE
E07 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
Y
N
N
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
ERROR CODE
E06 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
N
Y
CHECK MONITOR
INPUT CABLE AND
MULTISPEC POWER
SUPPLY CABLES
MONITOR
SEATED CORRECTLY
IN BACKPLANE?
N
CHECK MONITOR
INPUT CABLE
Y
N
CORRECT
VOLTAGES AT
BACKPLANE POWER
CONNECTOR?
ERROR CODE
E07 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
Y
Y
ERROR CODE
E07 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MULTISPEC
POWER SUPPLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
3-12
N
Y
REPLACE MULTISPEC
POWER SUPPLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.29
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
POWER-UP
LAMP TEST
OK?
ERROR CODE
E06 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
N
REPLACE MULTISPEC
ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.19
N
ERROR CODE
E06 IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MULTISPEC
ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 7 (continued): MULTISPEC Monitor and Analyzer Errors
OTHER ERROR
CODES IN MONITOR
WINDOW?
LOW END
TIDAL VOL AND INSP
CO2 READINGS?
N
Y
Y
CHECK FOR
SAMPLE LINE
OCCLUSION
RECALIBRATE
MULTISPEC ANALYZER
Y
LOW END
TIDAL VOL AND INSP
CO2 READINGS?
N
SLOW
RESPONSE TIME?
Y
REPLACE MONITOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.22
DOES MONITOR
OPERATE PROPERLY?
N
N
SLOW
RESPONSE TIME?
N
Y
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL MONITOR
REPLACE
MULTISPEC ANALYZER
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.19
Y
DOES ANALYZER
OPERATE PROPERLY?
N
DOES ANALYZER
OPERATE PROPERLY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
N
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
MULTISPEC ANALYZER
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM3
GUIDE 8: Serial Interface Communication Failure
START
SERIAL
PORT COMM
FAILURE?
CONNECT
EXTERNAL
COMM CABLE
N
Y
N
CHECK POWER
SUPPLIES AND
ASSOCIATED
WIRING HARNESSES
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
ECC MODULE
----------------------------REPLACE CCC ASM
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.24
EXTERNAL
CABLE CONNECTED
TO SERIAL PORT?
Y
N
CHECK CABLE:
J3 ON ECC MODULE
TO J4 ON CCC ASM
CORRECT
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE AT J3 ON
ECC MODULE?
SERIAL
PORT COMM
FAILURE?
Y
N
N
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CCC ASM
INTERNAL
DATA CABLE
CONNECTED?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
REPLACE ECC MODULE
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.20
N
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
SERIAL
PORT COMM
FAILURE?
N
Y
3-14
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 9: Loss of Keypad Response
START
CORRECT
KEYPAD
RESPONSE?
PLUG IN
OUTBOARD END OF
KEYPAD CABLE
Y
N
N
IS
KEYPAD CABLE
PLUGGED IN?
Y
SUBSTITUTE
REPLACEMENT
KEYPAD
CORRECT
KEYPAD
RESPONSE?
Y
REPLACE KEYPAD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE MACHINE
N
Y
RECONNECT
ORIGINAL KEYPAD
----------------------------REPLACE NEXT ASM:
ALARM CRT
(PROCEDURE 4.25)
TREND ASM
(PROCEDURE 4.23)
CORRECT
KEYPAD
RESPONSE?
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL ASM
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
N
DOES
MACHINE PASS
PMS?
Y
MACHINE IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.0
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
This section outlines removal and replacement procedures for the field-replaceable
assemblies of the NARKOMED 3 Anesthesia System.
These procedures are to be performed only by a Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified
Technical Service Representative (TSR).
The following are the only procedures authorized by Draeger Medical, Inc. to be
performed in the field. All other service procedures shall be referred to NAD’s
Technical Service Department.
NOTE:
Rev. F
The PMS PROCEDURE given in Section 6 must be performed
after any replacement, removal, calibration or adjustment
procedure.
4-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.1
NM3
Cylinder Yoke Assemblies
Each cylinder yoke contains a replaceable filter and check valve assembly.
Replacement of this assembly requires that the yoke be removed from the
anesthesia machine. Figure 4-1 shows a typical cylinder yoke mounting
arrangement. Access to the yoke mounting screws and gas line connection
requires that the table top be removed from the machine.
4.1.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.1.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.1.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.1.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.1.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.1.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.1.7
Remove the cylinder where the yoke is to be replaced.
WARNING:
Store the cylinder in a safe place and lay it on its side.
4.1.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.1.9
Pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.1.10
Disconnect the gas line fitting at the yoke and remove the two yoke
mounting screws.
4.1.11
Remove the filter and check valve assembly from the yoke and install
a replacement assembly.
If the entire yoke assembly is being replaced, ensure that the
replacement yoke has the correct label and pin indexing arrangement.
NOTE: If the yoke spacer is removed from the frame rail of the machine, be
sure to re-install it in its original position.
4-2
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
YOKE
ASSEMBLY
(TYPICAL)
YOKE
SPACER
FILTER AND
CHECK VALVE
ASSEMBLY
SV40601
GAS LINE
Figure 4-1: CYLINDER YOKE ASSEMBLY
Rev. G
4-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.1.12
Position the yoke on the spacer, and install the two mounting screws
and lockwashers. Tighten the screws securely. Connect the gas line
fitting to the yoke.
4.1.13
If a new cylinder is being installed, remove the old sealing washer
from the gas inlet of the yoke and install a new washer.
4.1.14
Install the correct cylinder in the yoke, making sure that the index
pins are properly engaged before tightening the handle bolt. The
cylinder should hang vertically after the handle is tight.
4.1.15
Perform the following leak test on the yoke assembly:
4.1.15.1
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure:
O2
N2O
HE
CO2
AIR
N2
:
:
:
:
:
:
1000 PSI
700 PSI
1000 PSI
800 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
4.1.15.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.1.15.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
PSI in two minutes.
4.1.16
Re-install the cylinder in the yoke.
4.1.17
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.1.18
Replace the pipeline hoses.
4.1.19
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-4
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.2
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Cylinder Pressure Regulators
Access to the cylinder pressure regulators requires that the table top be
removed from the anesthesia machine. Figure 4-2 shows the mounting
arrangement of the regulators and typical connections.
NOTE: For Canada machines the replacement procedure is similar, but
different part numbers apply to the regulator assemblies. Refer to
Section 8 for the listing of part numbers.
4.2.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.2.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.2.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.2.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.2.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.2.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.2.7
Remove the cylinder corresponding to the regulator to be replaced.
4.2.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.2.9
Remove the top drawer from the cabinet and pull the writing or
keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.2.10
Disconnect the three compression fittings at the regulator.
4.2.11
Loosen the two setscrews holding the regulator to its mounting
bracket and remove the regulator.
4.2.12
Record the serial number of the regulator that was removed, and
record the serial number of the replacement regulator.
4.2.13
Position the replacement regulator in its mounting bracket, and
connect the three compression fittings. Do not tighten the fittings yet.
4-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
TOP VIEW WITH
TABLE TOP REMOVED
O2 CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
N2O CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
SET
SCREWS
AIR OR OPTIONAL
3RD GAS CYLINDER
PRESSURE REGULATOR
TEST GAUGE
CONNECTION
(TYPICAL)
SIDE VIEW
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
SV20342
ACORN NUT
Figure 4-2: CYLINDER PRESSURE REGULATORS
4-6
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.2.14
Tighten the regulator mounting setscrews to a torque of 50 to 55 in.
lbs.
4.2.15
Tighten the compression fittings.
4.2.16
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter regulator output line,
and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
4.2.17
Connect a test gauge to the TEE fitting.
4.2.18
Install the cylinder that was previously removed.
4.2.19
Open the O2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.2.20
Set the oxygen flow to 4 liters per min.
4.2.21A For the O2 pressure regulator:
The test gauge should indicate between 43 and 49 PSI.
4.2.21B For the other pressure regulators:
Open the corresponding cylinder valve and set the gas flow to 4
liters per min. (900 ml per min. for CO2).
The test gauge should indicate between 43 and 49 PSI. (27 and
33 PSI for CO2).
4.2.22
If the regulator output pressure is not within the correct range,
remove the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator to expose the
adjusting screw. Turn the screw until the test gauge indicates in the
correct range, and replace the acorn nut.
4.2.23
Close the cylinder valve and allow pressure to drain from the system.
4.2.24
Close all of the flow control valves and set the System Power switch
to STANDBY.
4.2.25
Disconnect the test gauge from the TEE fitting and replace the plug
in the fitting.
4-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.2.26
NM3
Perform the following leak test on the high pressure side of the
regulator:
4.2.26.1
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure:
O2
N2O
HE
CO2
AIR
N2
:
:
:
:
:
:
1000 PSI
700 PSI
1000 PSI
800 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
4.2.26.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.2.26.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
PSI in two minutes.
4.2.27
Re-install the cylinder in the yoke.
4.2.28
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.2.29
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
4.2.30
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.2.31
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Cylinder Cutoff Valves (Canada)
Access to the cylinder cutoff valves requires removal of the table top from the
anesthesia machine. Figure 4-3 shows the locations of the O2 and N2O cutoff
valve assemblies. For machines equipped with a third gas, the tubing
arrangement is similar to the N2O cutoff valve assembly.
4.3.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.3.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.3.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.3.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.3.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.3.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.3.7
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.3.8
Remove the top drawer from the cabinet and pull the writing or
keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.3.9
Disconnect the compression fittings indicated at points marked C on
the illustration.
4.3.10
Cut the tie-wrap clamp and disconnect the flexible tubing from the
cutoff valve assembly at the point marked A on the illustration.
4.3.11
Remove the cylinder cutoff assembly.
4.3.12
Connect the flexible tubing to the replacement cutoff valve assembly
and secure it with a new tie-wrap clamp.
4.3.13
Connect and tighten the compression fittings at points marked C on
the illustration.
4.3.14
Perform the following test:
--
Remove the plug from the test gauge connection at the Tee
fitting in the regulator outlet piping, and install a test gauge.
4-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
TOP VIEW WITH TABLE TOP REMOVED
SV20343
A
C
C
C
C
C
A
N2O CYLINDER CUTOFF
VALVE ASSEMBLY
O2 CYLINDER CUTOFF
VALVE ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-3: CYLINDER CUTOFF VALVES (CANADA)
4-10
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NOTE:
The cylinders used for this test must contain the
following minimum pressure:
:
O2
AIR :
O2+He :
N2O :
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
745 PSI
--
Set the System Power switch to ON.
--
For the O2 cutoff valve: open the O2 cylinder valve and set the
oxygen flow to 4 liters per min.
--
For the N2O cutoff valve: open the O2 cylinder valve and the N2O
cylinder valve. Set each flow to 4 liters per min.
--
Verify that regulator outlet pressure is between 43 and 49 PSI.
--
Connect the pipeline hoses and pressurize to 50 PSI.
--
Turn off the pipeline supply and observe the pipeline pressure
gauge.
--
The cutoff valve shall open when the pipeline pressure drops
through the range of 45 to 40 PSI.
--
Close the cylinder valve(s), and close the flow control valve(s).
--
Disconnect test pressure gauge and reinstall the plug in the
regulator outlet piping.
4.3.15
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.3.16
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
4.3.17
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.3.18
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.4
NM3
Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges
Replacement of the cylinder and pipeline pressure gauges requires that the
plexiglass front cover be removed from the gas instrumentation panel, and also
the rear cover for access to the gauge connections. Figure 4-4 shows
disassembly and mounting details.
4.4.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.4.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.4.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.4.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.4.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.4.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
NOTE:
Steps 4.4.8 thru 4.4.12 apply to later machines with a
one-piece flowmeter and gauge cover.
4.4.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.4.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.4.9A
Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover. Hold the front plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.4.9B
Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover panel, and
remove the panel.
4.4.10
Remove the O2 flow control knob. The knob has two setscrews.
NOTE:
4.4.11
If the knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew,
carefully note its position so that it can be re-assembled
in the same position with the "Off Stop" properly set.
Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard. (For earlier machines with the bar-type knob guard,
the screws holding the guard assembly are accessible through the
back of the flowmeter housing.)
4-12
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW OF
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
FRONT COVER
RETAINER SCREWS
GAUGE
MOUNTING
NUTS (TYPICAL)
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
CONNECTION
(PIPELINE
PRESSURE
GAUGES)
COMPRESSION FITTING
(CYLINDER PRESSURE GAUGES)
SV40644
Figure 4-4: CYLINDER AND PIPELINE PRESSURE GAUGES
Rev. G
4-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.4.12
NM3
Remove the screws holding the plexiglass cover over the flow tubes
and gauges, and carefully remove the cover.
NOTE:
Intermediate assemblies may need to be removed to allow
access to the gauge connections and mounting hardware.
Be sure to keep a record of the disassembly sequence so
that all tubing can be correctly re-assembled.
4.4.13A For the cylinder pressure gauges:
Disconnect the compression fitting at the back of the gauge.
Remove the gauge mounting nuts and washers, and remove the gauge
from the front of the panel.
NOTE:
If applicable, transfer the gauge cover (lens) from the
original gauge to the replacement gauge.
Install the replacement gauge in the panel using the flat washers,
lock washers and mounting nuts that were previously removed.
Connect the gas line to the gauge and tighten the compression fitting.
4.3.13B For the pipeline pressure gauges:
Locate the flexible tubing connecting the gauge to the pipeline inlet
assembly, cut the tie-wrap tubing clamp at the pipeline inlet and
disconnect the tubing.
Remove the gauge mounting nuts and washers, and remove the gauge
from the front of the panel.
Cut the tie-wrap tubing clamp and disconnect the flexible tubing from
the gauge.
Connect a new 7-inch length of tubing (8-inch for the air pipeline
pressure gauge) to the replacement gauge and secure it with a new
tie-wrap clamp.
Place the gauge in the panel and secure it with the flat washers, lock
washers and mounting nuts that were previously removed.
Connect the other end of the flexible tubing to the pipeline inlet
assembly and secure it with a tie-wrap clamp.
4.4.14
If a cylinder pressure gauge was replaced, perform the following leak
test:
4-14
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.4.14.1
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure:
O2
N2O
HE
CO2
AIR
N2
4.4.15
:
:
:
:
:
:
1000 PSI
700 PSI
1000 PSI
800 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
4.4.14.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.4.14.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
PSI in two minutes.
Reinstall the cylinder in the yoke.
NOTE:
Steps 4.4.16 thru 4.4.19 apply to later machines with a
one-piece flowmeter and gauge cover.
4.4.16
Place the plexiglass cover over the gauges and flow tubes, and
reinstall the cover screws. Do not over-tighten these screws as the
plexiglass may crack.
4.4.17
Place the knob guard over the flow control valves and install its two
retaining screws. (Reinstall the bar-type knob guard on earlier
machines.)
4.4.18
Reinstall the O2 flow control knob and tighten its setscrews. If the
knob is installed properly, the O2 label will be straight when the knob
is against its clockwise stop.
4.4.19
Replace the front cover plate at the top of the plexiglass cover and
secure it with the hardware that was previously removed.
4.4.20
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.4.21
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.4.22
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.4.23
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.5
NM3
Flowmeters
The flowmeter tubes are held by compression in gaskets at the top and bottom
of each tube. Each upper gasket is seated in an adjustable retainer that allows
removal of the tube as shown in Figure 4-5. Access to the flow tubes and their
retainers requires removal of the plexiglass cover on the gas instrumentation
panel.
4.5.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.5.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.5.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.5.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.5.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.5.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.5.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
NOTE:
Steps 4.5.8, 4.5.10, and 4.5.11 apply to later machines
with a one-piece flowmeter and gauge cover.
4.5.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.5.9A
Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover. Hold the front plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.4.9B
Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover panel, and
remove the panel.
4.5.10
Remove the O2 flow control knob. The knob has two setscrews.
NOTE:
4.5.11
If the knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew,
carefully note its position so that it can be re-assembled
in the same position with the "Off Stop" properly set.
Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard. (For earlier machines with the bar-type knob guard,
the screws holding the guard assembly are accessible through the
back of the flowmeter housing.)
4-16
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
FLOW TUBE
RETAINER SCREW
UPPER FLOW
TUBE RETAINER
FLOW TUBE
LIGHTING CHANNEL
FLOW
RESTRICTOR
SV40605
GUIDE RING
GASKET
Figure 4-5: FLOWMETERS
Rev. G
4-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.5.12
Remove the screws holding the plexiglass cover over the flow tubes
and gauges, and carefully remove the cover.
4.5.13
Loosen the screw directly above the flowmeter tube to be replaced.
Turning the screw counter clockwise will raise the upper flow tube
retainer. Raise the retainer far enough to be able to pull the top of
the tube outward, and remove the tube.
NOTE:
If the bottom of the tube is seated in a flow restrictor, be
sure that the arrangement of the restrictor and its
gaskets is not disturbed.
4.5.14
Make sure that the replacement flow tube bears the correct markings
and has a ball.
4.5.15
Place the bottom of the flowmeter tube into the guide ring of the
lower gasket seal, and position the top of the flow tube into the center
guide ring of the top gasket seal. It will be easier to hold the tube if
the adjacent lighting channel is pulled forward and temporarily
removed.
CAUTION: The flowmeter tube must be properly centered over the
guide rings or damage to the flowmeter tube may occur.
4.5.16
Ensure that the markings on the flow tube are facing forward, and
turn the upper retainer screw clockwise until the flow tube is firmly
held in place.
CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the screw as the flowmeter tube may
break.
4.5.17
Perform the following leak test on the system:
4.5.17.1
Disconnect the absorber hose from the freshgas outlet.
4.5.17.2
Connect a test gauge and B.P. bulb to the freshgas outlet,
and pressurize the system to 50 cm H2O.
4.5.17.3
The pressure should not drop more than 10 cm H2O in
thirty seconds.
4.5.18
Disconnect the test gauge and re-connect the absorber hose to the
freshgas outlet.
4.5.19
Replace any lighting channels that were previously removed.
4-18
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.5.20
Place the plexiglass cover over the gauges and flow tubes, and
reinstall the cover screws. Do not over-tighten these screws as the
plexiglass may crack.
NOTE:
Steps 4.5.21, 4.5.22, and 4.5.25 apply to later machines
with a one-piece flowmeter and gauge cover.
4.5.21
Place the knob guard over the flow control valves and reinstall its two
retaining screws. (Reinstall the bar-type knob guard on earlier
machines.)
4.5.22
Reinstall the O2 flow control knob and tighten its setscrews. If the
knob is installed properly, the O2 label will be straight when the knob
is against its clockwise stop.
4.5.23
Replace the front cover plate at the top of the plexiglass cover and
secure it with the hardware that was previously removed.
4.5.24
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.5.25
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.5.26
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.5.27
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.6
NM3
Flow Control Valves
The flow control valves have replaceable elements that are removable from the
front of the gas instrumentation panel as shown in Figure 4-6. Each flow
control knob has a clockwise positive stop arrangement that prevents damage
to the valve seat. Whenever a valve cartridge is replaced, the "off stop" must
be set as outlined in the following procedure.
4.6.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.6.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.6.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.6.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.6.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.6.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.6.7
Remove the O2 flow control knob, and the knob on the valve to be
replaced.
4.6.8
If applicable, remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place,
and remove the knob guard.
4.6.9
Remove the stop pin nut.
4.6.10
Remove the flow control valve by holding it at the wrench flats and
turning it counter-clockwise.
4.6.11
Install the replacement flow control valve in the valve housing.
CAUTION: Before tightening the cartridge, rotate the valve shaft
several turns counter-clockwise to prevent bottoming the
valve element into the seat when the cartridge is
tightened.
4.6.12
Replace the stop pin nut.
4.6.13
If applicable, replace the knob guard and secure it with the two
mounting screws.
4-20
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VALVE
HOUSING
FLOW CONTROL
VALVE
STOP PIN
NUT
WRENCH
FLATS
KNOB GUARD
(NEW STYLE)
LABEL
KNOB
KNOB GUARD
(OLD STYLE)
SV20606
Figure 4-6: FLOW CONTROL VALVES
Rev. G
4-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.6.14
NM3
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.6.15A For the O2 flow control valve:
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
Turn the flow control valve clockwise until the flow rate will not
drop any further. (If the machine has been modified to eliminate
the minimum flow feature, turn the valve until the flow rate is
zero.)
4.6.15B For the other gas flow control valves:
Open the oxygen cylinder valve, and open the cylinder valve
corresponding to the flow control valve replacement.
Set the oxygen flow rate to four liters per minute.
Turn the other gas flow control valve clockwise until the flow
rate is zero.
4.6.16
Place the knob on the flow control valve shaft and turn it clockwise
until it engages the stop pin. Tighten one of the knob setscrews.
4.6.17
Turn the knob in both directions and ensure that the flow can be
controlled over its entire range. When the valve is closed, the knob
should be against the clockwise stop. Tighten the remaining setscrew.
4.6.18
If the knob label is not horizontal when the valve is closed, remove
the label and install a new label in the correct position.
4.6.19
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.6.20
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-22
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.7
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Supply Pressure Failure Protection Device
The oxygen supply failure protection devices (failsafe assemblies) are located
behind the gas instrumentation panel. Access to these assemblies requires
removal of the rear cover. Figure 4-7 shows a typical arrangement of a failsafe
assembly and its connections. Replacement assemblies are supplied with all
hardware out to the first compression fitting in each line.
4.7.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.7.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.7.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.7.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.7.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.7.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.7.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.7.8
Cut the tie-wrap clamp on the flexible O2 control line, and disconnect
the flexible tube.
4.7.9
Disconnect the compression fittings at the outlet and at both inlets,
and remove the assembly.
4.7.10
Install the replacement failsafe assembly, and tighten the three
compression fittings.
4.7.11
Connect the flexible tubing to the control port, and install a new tiewrap clamp.
4-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
O2 CONTROL
LINE
OXYGEN SUPPLY
FAILURE PROTECTION
DEVICE (N2O CONTROL
DEVICE ILLUSTRATED)
OUTLET
REAR VIEW,
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER
REMOVED
CYLINDER
INLET
CHECK
VALVE
SV40607
PIPELINE INLET
Figure 4-7: OXYGEN SUPPLY FAILURE PROTECTION DEVICE
4-24
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.7.12
Perform the following test:
4.7.12.1
Open the cylinder valves.
4.7.12.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.7.12.3
Set the oxygen flow to five liters per minute.
4.7.12.4
Set the other gas flow to five liters per minute.
4.7.12.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.7.12.6
As the oxygen flow decreases, the other gas flow should
also decrease proportionally.
4.7.12.7
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.7.13
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.7.14
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.7.15
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.8
NM3
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch
The oxygen supply pressure alarm switch is located behind the gas
instrumentation panel. Access to the switch requires removal of the rear cover.
The replacement switch must be tested to ensure that its operating point is set
correctly. Figure 4-8 shows the switch assembly and the location of its
adjustment.
4.8.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.8.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.8.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.8.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.8.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.8.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.8.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.8.8
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the TEE.
4.8.9
Note the position of the wires on the switch so that the replacement
unit can be connected in the same manner. Disconnect the wires from
the switch and remove the assembly.
4.8.10
Connect the wires to the replacement assembly; connect and tighten
the compression fittings on the O2 lines.
4.8.11
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.8.12
Pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.8.13
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter output line of the O2
regulator and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
4.8.14
Connect a test gauge to the TEE fitting.
4.8.15
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to
ON.
4-26
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW, FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
SV40608
O2 LINES
ALARM
WIRES
INCREASE
SETPOINT
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
Figure 4-8: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
Rev. G
4-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.8.16
Set the oxygen flow to five liters per minute.
4.8.17
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.8.18
As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
4.8.19
If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel counter-clockwise, repeat the test and adjust as
necessary to bring the set point into the correct range.
If the alarm activates when the pressure is above 40 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel clockwise,repeat the test and adjust as necessary
to bring the set point into the correct range.
4.8.20
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.8.21
Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator line
TEE fitting.
4.8.22
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.8.23
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.8.24
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.8.25
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-28
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.9
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada)
The oxygen supply pressure alarm whistle is located inside the flowmeter
housing. Access to the whistle assembly requires removal of the flowmeter
housing rear cover. Figure 4-9 shows the arrangement of the whistle assembly
within the flowmeter housing, and indicates the compression fittings that need
to be disconnected in order to remove the assembly.
4.9.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.9.2
Close all cylinder valves and disconnect the pipeline hoses.
4.9.3
Press the O2 FLUSH button to remove pressure from the oxygen
circuit.
4.9.4
Remove the screws holding the flowmeter housing rear cover, and
remove the cover.
4.9.5
Disconnect the three compression fittings at the locations shown in
the illustration, and remove the whistle assembly.
4.9.6
Position the replacement whistle assembly in the flowmeter housing,
connect and tighten the three compression fittings.
4.9.7
Replace the flowmeter housing rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.9.8
Connect the pipeline hoses and perform the following test:
4.9.9
--
Set the System Power switch to ON.
--
Set the oxygen flow rate to 1 l/min.
--
Close the pipeline supply valve and observe the pipeline
pressure gauge.
--
The alarm whistle shall sound for a minimum of 10 seconds
when the pressure drops below the range of 35 to 30 PSI.
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
REAR VIEW OF
FLOWMETER HOUSING (CANADA)
WITH COVER REMOVED
COMPRESSION
FITTING
WHISTLE
ASSEMBLY
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
SIDE VIEW
OF LOWER
COMPRESSION
FITTING
SV20324
Figure 4-9: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM WHISTLE (CANADA)
4-30
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.10
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller
The oxygen ratio monitor/controller (ORMC) is located in the vapor box and is
accessible by removing the rear cover panel above the vaporizer mounts.
Figure 4-10 shows the location of the ORMC mounting screws and connections.
Test and adjustment instructions are included in the following procedure.
NOTE: Steps marked with an asterisk (*) do not apply to later model
machines that do not have the O2/N2O ratio lamp on the alarm
channel.
4.10.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.10.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.10.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.10.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.10.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.10.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.10.7
Remove the four screws holding the vapor box rear cover, and remove
the cover.
4.10.8
Remove the two screws holding the ORMC to the bottom of the vapor
box.
4.10.9
Remove the four screws holding the bottom plate of the vapor box,
and remove the plate to gain access to the ORMC connections.
4.10.10 Disconnect the flexible O2 tubing from the left side of the ORMC, and
disconnect the flexible N2O tubing from the right side of the MPL
switch. (Later models do not have the MPL switch.)
*
4.10.11 Cut the tie-wrap clamp on the in-line wiring harness connectors, and
separate the two ORMC connections.
4.10.12 While holding the ORMC, carefully disconnect the compression
fittings on the N2O lines.
4.10.13 Disconnect the remaining flexible N2O tubing from the tee fitting at
the front of the ORMC. (Later models do not have the tee fitting.)
4-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3
REAR VIEW
N2O TUBING
O2 TUBING
N20
MPL SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO DECREASE
SETPOINT)
N20
A
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR/CONTROLLER
CAM
MOUNTING
BRACKET
E
SWITCH MOUNT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CAM
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO CLOSE CONTACTS)
H
SV30311
Figure 4-10: OXYGEN RATIO MONITOR/CONTROLLER
4-32
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.10.14 Connect the flexible N2O tubing that was removed in the previous
step to the tee fitting at the front of the replacement ORMC, and
secure the connection with a new tie strap clamp. (Later models do
not have the tee fitting.)
4.10.15 Connect the copper N2O lines to the replacement ORMC and tighten
the compression fittings.
*
4.10.16 Join the in-line wiring harness to the replacement ORMC connectors
and install a new tie-wrap cable clamp.
4.10.17 Connect the flexible O2 tubing to the left side of the ORMC, and
connect the flexible N2O tubing to right side of the MPL switch.
Secure each connection with a press-on clamp. (Later models do not
have the MPL switch.)
4.10.18 Open the O2 and N2O cylinder valves.
4.10.19 Set the System Power switch to ON, and perform the following test:
*
*
4.10.19.1
Open the N2O flow control valve three turns. There
should be no nitrous oxide flow.
4.10.19.2
Slowly open the O2 flow control valve. The nitrous oxide
should start to flow when the oxygen flow is between 200
and 300 ml per minute.
4.10.19.3
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the Freshgas
Outlet.
4.10.19.4
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute. The oxygen
concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
4.10.19.5
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.6
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 liters per minute. The
oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29%
oxygen.
4.10.19.7
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.8
Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
4-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
*
4.10.19.9
NM3
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.10 Close the oxygen flow control valve. The nitrous oxide
flow should decrease proportionally, and the oxygen
concentration should remain between 21% and 29%
oxygen.
4.10.19.11 The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of
oxygen is between 200 and 300 ml per minute.
4.10.19.12 Close the N2O flow control valve and set the System
Power switch to STANDBY.
NOTE:
If the ORMC is not working properly, skip
to the adjustment procedure beginning in
Paragraph 4.10.24.
4.10.20 Replace the bottom plate of the vapor box. Be sure it is oriented
correctly with the ORMC mounting holes in the correct position.
4.10.21 Secure the ORMC to the bottom of the vapor box with its two
mounting screws.
4.10.22 Replace the rear cover of the vapor box.
4.10.23 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4.10.24 Following is the adjustment procedure for the ORMC:
4.10.24.1
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
4.10.24.2
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
4.10.24.3
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.10.24.4
Close the O2 flow control valve.
4.10.24.5
Open the N2O flow control valve to its counter-clockwise
stop.
4.10.24.6
If there is no nitrous oxide flow, proceed to Step
4.10.24.8.
4.10.24.7
If there is nitrous oxide flow, loosen set screw E and
move the cam mounting bracket to the right until the
nitrous oxide flow stops. Tighten set screw E.
4-34
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.10.24.8
Slowly open the O2 flow control valve.
4.10.24.9
If the nitrous oxide starts to flow when the oxygen flow
is between 200 and 300 ml per minute, proceed to step
4.10.24.12.
4.10.24.10 If the nitrous oxide does not start to flow when the
oxygen flow is between 200 and 300 ml per minute,
loosen set screw E and move the cam mounting bracket
to the left until nitrous oxide flow starts. Tighten set
screw E.
4.10.24.11 Repeat steps 4.10.24.4 through 4.10.24.10 until no
further adjustment of the cam mounting bracket is
needed.
4.10.24.12 Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
4.10.24.13 The oxygen concentration should be between 21% and
29% oxygen.
*
4.10.24.14 If the yellow O2 /N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel is lighted, proceed to step 18.
*
4.10.24.15 If the yellow O2 /N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel is not lighted, loosen set screw H and turn the
switch adjustment cam until it is pointing downward.
*
4.10.24.16 Loosen set screw A and move the switch mount until it
is nearly touching the switch adjustment cam. Tighten
setscrew A.
*
4.10.24.17 Turn the cam clockwise until the switch contacts close
and the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp is lighted. Tighten
set screw H.
*
4.10.24.18 Close the N2O flow control valve.
*
4.10.24.19 Adjust the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute.
*
4.10.24.20 Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
4.10.24.21 The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow
of nitrous oxide.
*
4.10.24.22 Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 liters per minute.
4-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
*
4.10.24.23 Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
4.10.24.24 The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow
of nitrous oxide.
4.10.24.25 Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 liters per minute.
4.10.24.26 Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
4.10.24.27 The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow
of nitrous oxide.
4.10.24.28 Close the oxygen flow control valve. The nitrous oxide
flow should decrease proportionally, and the oxygen
concentration should remain between 21% and 29%
oxygen.
4.10.24.29 The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of
oxygen is between 200 and 300 ml per minute.
*
4.10.24.30 If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp turns off when the
nitrous oxide flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml per
minute, proceed to Step 4.10.24.32.
*
4.10.24.31 If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp does not turn off when
the nitrous oxide flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml
per minute, adjust the MPL switch until the O2/N2O
FLOW RATIO lamp turns off.
4.10.24.32 Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.10.24.33 Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.10.24.34 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure
from the system.
4.10.24.35 Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve.
Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from
the system.
4.10.24.36 Close the N2O flow control valve.
4.10.24.37 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.
4.10.24.38 Replace the rear cover of the vapor box.
4.10.24.39 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-36
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.11
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizers
Each vaporizer is held to the machine by two metric sized hex screws. These
screws are accessible at the back of the vaporizer mount, below the interlock
mechanism as shown in Figure 4-11. Before removing a vaporizer from the
machine, it must be completely drained and dried in accordance with the
procedure given below. Be sure to have a suitable packing or storage container
available in which to place the vaporizer.
CAUTION:
The following steps must be performed in the sequence given.
4.11.1
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.11.2
Set all vaporizer handwheels to their Zero or OFF position.
WARNING:
Do not inhale anesthetic vapors as this could
result in personal injury.
4.11.3
Remove the filler and drain plugs, and drain the vaporizer into a
suitable container. Dispose of the residual agent in an approved
manner.
4.11.4
Turn the vaporizer handwheel to the maximum concentration setting.
4.11.5
Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min. for at least 20 minutes.
WARNING:
This procedure must be performed in a well
ventilated area and without personnel present.
4.11.6
Turn the vaporizer handwheel to 0 (zero), and replace the filler and
drain plugs.
4.11.7
Turn the oxygen flow off, and set the System Power switch to
STANDBY.
4.11.8
While holding the vaporizer, remove the mounting screws and
carefully separate the vaporizer from the machine. Note the
arrangement of gaskets so that the replacement vaporizer can be
installed in the same manner.
4.11.9
Place the vaporizer in a suitable container for transport or storage.
WARNING:
Do not tilt a vaporizer that contains anesthetic
agent more than 45 degrees. Failure to observe
this precaution will render the handwheel
calibration invalid.
4-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
VAPORIZER MOUNT
LOCKING
NUT
INTERLOCK
PIN
HANDWHEEL
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING
SCREWS (2 EA)
(RECESSED)
SV20325
VAPORIZER
INTERLOCK
MECHANISM
REAR VIEW
LEFT
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING SCREW
LOCATIONS (2 EA)
RIGHT
SETSCREW
CENTER
SETSCREWS
(RECESSED)
Figure 4-11: VAPORIZER INSTALLATION AND INTERLOCK ADJUSTMENT
4-38
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NOTE:
Should a vaporizer containing anesthetic agent be
accidentally tilted more than 45 degrees, it must be
drained and flushed in accordance with instructions given
in the manual supplied with the vaporizer.
4.11.10 Set the handwheel on the replacement vaporizer to its Zero position.
4.11.11 Install the replacement vaporizer on the machine (be sure the O-rings
are in place) and tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 24 to
26.5 inch pounds.
4.11.12 Perform the following test on the interlock mechanism and make any
necessary adjustments:
4.11.12.1
Turn the center vaporizer handwheel ON. The left and
the right vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their
Zero position. If the left or right vaporizer does not lock,
tighten the corresponding center set screw until the
handwheel locks properly.
4.11.12.2
Turn the center vaporizer OFF and turn the left
vaporizer ON. The center and the right vaporizer
handwheels should be locked in their Zero position. If
the right vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking nut
on the right set screw and adjust the set screw until the
handwheel locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while
holding the set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE:
4.11.12.3
Do not over-tighten the set screws. Each
vaporizer handwheel must turn easily
while the other vaporizers are locked .
Turn the left vaporizer OFF and turn the right vaporizer
ON. The center and the left vaporizer handwheels
should be locked in their Zero position. If the left
vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking nut on the left
set screw and adjust the set screw until the handwheel
locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while holding the
set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
4.11.13 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.12
NM3
O2 Flush Valve
The O2 flush valve is located at the front of the machine next to the freshgas
outlet. Access to the flush valve requires removal of the table top. Figure 4-12
shows the mounting and assembly details of the flush valve.
4.12.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.12.2
Disconnect all pipeline hoses.
4.12.3
Close the O2 cylinder valve.
4.12.4
Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.12.5
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.12.6
Hold the O2 Flush button in and rotate it until one of its set screws
are visible through the access hole in the guard ring, and loosen the
set screw.
4.12.7
Turn the O2 Flush button 180 degrees, hold it in and loosen the other
set screw.
4.12.8
Remove the O2 Flush button and washer from the valve shaft.
4.12.9
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the valve.
NOTE:
Do not lose the flow restrictor located at the right-angle
fitting. This restrictor will be transferred to the
replacement valve assembly.
4.12.10 The O2 Flush valve is retained by the guard ring on the front of the
machine frame. Hold the body of the Clippard valve with an open end
wrench; insert a rod or hex wrench through the holes in the guard
ring (or use a spanner wrench), and un-screw the guard ring from the
front of the frame rail.
4.12.11 Assemble the replacement O2 Flush valve, spacer, internal tooth lock
washer and guard ring through the frame and tighten the assembly,
making sure that the valve is mounted straight.
4-40
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
COMPRESSION
FITTINGS
RESTRICTOR
O2 FLUSH
VALVE
SPACER
ACCESS
HOLES
WASHER
INTERNAL TOOTH
LOCKWASHER
PUSH
BUTTON
GUARD
RING
FRONT VIEW WITH
TABLE TOP REMOVED
SET SCREWS
SV49099
Figure 4-12: O2 FLUSH VALVE
Rev. G
4-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.12.12 Connect the compression fittings to the valve. Be sure the flow
restrictor is in place at the right-angle fitting.
4.12.13 Place the washer and the O2 Flush button on the valve shaft.
4.12.14 Hold the O2 Flush button in and turn it until a set screw is visible
through an access hole in the guard ring. Tighten the set screw.
Rotate the button 180 degrees until the other set screw is visible, and
tighten the set screw.
4.12.15 Disconnect the absorber freshgas hose from the freshgas outlet.
Connect a test gauge and B.P. bulb to the freshgas outlet, and
perform the following test:
4.12.15.1
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.12.15.2
Release any pressure that is indicated on the test gauge.
4.12.15.3
Over the next 60 seconds, the test gauge should not show
a pressure increase greater than 2 cm H2O.
4.12.15.4
Increase the pressure to 50 cm H2O.
4.12.15.5
The pressure should not drop more than 10 cm H2O in
the next 30 seconds.
4.12.15.6
Disconnect the test gauge from the freshgas outlet.
4.12.15.7
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and allow the pressure to
stabilize. (The cylinder pressure must be at least 1000 psi
for this test.)
4.12.15.8
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.12.15.9
The pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes.
4.12.15.10 Connect a volumeter to the freshgas outlet, and reset the
volumeter to zero.
4.12.15.11 Press the O2 Flush button and observe the flow rate. It
should be between 45 and 65 liters per minute.
4-42
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.12.15.12 Disconnect the volumeter from the freshgas outlet.
4.12.16 Connect the absorber freshgas hose to the freshgas outlet.
4.12.17 Replace the table top and secure it with the mounting screws.
4.12.18 Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.12.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.13
NM3
Ventilator Controller Assembly
The ventilator controller assembly is located in the left side of the ventilator
box. Access to the controller requires removing the front panel from the
ventilator box. Figure 4-13 shows the mounting screw locations and cable
connections to the ventilator controller.
4.13.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.13.2
Remove the four screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
Remove the panel and carefully separate the ventilator switch in-line
connector.
4.13.3
Remove the two screws holding the ventilator controller assembly to
the floor of the ventilator box.
4.13.4
Pull the controller assembly forward and disconnect the two cables
from J1 and J2 at the back of the assembly, and remove the
controller assembly.
4.13.5
Plug the cables that were previously removed into J1 and J2 on the
back of the replacement controller assembly.
4-44
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
SV20327
IN-LINE
CONNECTOR
J1
J2
VENTILATOR
SWITCH
VENTILATOR
CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
SCREWS (6)
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
Figure 4-13: VENTILATOR CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
Rev. G
4-45
VENTILATOR
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.13.6
Mount the replacement controller assembly to the floor of the
ventilator box and secure it with the two mounting screws.
4.13.7
Join the ventilator switch in-line connector, and replace the front
panel of the ventilator box.
4.13.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-46
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.14
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Ventilator Solenoid Valve
The ventilator solenoid valve is located in the ventilator box and is mounted
on the inner back wall of the box. Replacement of the solenoid valve requires
lifting the monitor box to gain access to its mounting and connections. Figure
4-14 shows the mounting location, electrical connections and tubing
arrangement of the solenoid valve.
4.14.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.14.2
Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
4.14.3
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of this procedure.
Raise the rear left side of the monitor box chassis approximately two
inches, and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.14.4
Remove the two screws holding the safety cover over the AC power
filter, and remove the cover.
4.14.5
Remove the two screws holding the solenoid valve to the inner wall
of the ventilator box.
4-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
COVER SCREWS
VENTILATOR SOLENOID VALVE
MOUNTING SCREWS (2)
AC POWER
FILTER COVER
XXX
XXX.
XXX
INPUT
PORT
OUTPUT
PORT
SV20328
VENTILATOR
SOLENOID VALVE
Figure 4-14: VENTILATOR SOLENOID VALVE
4-48
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.14.6
Remove the prop from the rear left side of the monitor box, and
return the box to its normal position.
4.14.7
Raise the front of the monitor box approximately four inches, and
prop the box open.
4.14.8
Pull the solenoid valve forward to gain access to its connections, and
remove the electrical connections.
4.14.9
Remove the three flexible tubing connections and remove the solenoid
valve. Mark each tube so that the replacement solenoid can be
connected in the same manner.
4.14.10 Connect the flexible tubing to the replacement solenoid valve.
4.14.11 Connect the two wires to the solenoid, and place the solenoid near its
mounting position.
4.14.12 Remove the prop from the front of the monitor box and lower the box
to its original position.
4.14.13 Raise the rear of the monitor box chassis approximately two inches,
and prop the box open.
4.14.14 Mount the solenoid valve to the ventilator box using the original
hardware.
4.14.15 Replace the safety cover over the AC power filter and secure it with
the two screws.
4.14.16 Remove the prop from the rear of the monitor box, and return the box
to its normal position.
4.14.17 Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.14.18 Restore power to the machine and perform the PMS Procedure given
in Section 6.
4-49
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.15
NM3
Convenience Outlet AC Power Filter
The convenience outlet AC power filter is located in the back of the ventilator
box near the AC convenience outlets. Access to the power filter requires lifting
the monitor box. Figure 4-15 shows the location of the filter, its connections
and its mounting arrangement.
4.15.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.15.2
Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
4.15.3
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of this procedure.
Raise the rear of the monitor box chassis approximately two inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.15.4
Remove the two screws holding the safety cover over the AC power
filter, and remove the cover.
4.15.5
Disconnect the AC wiring from each side of the filter. Note the
position of the wires so they can be re-installed in the same manner.
4-50
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
FILTER
MOUNTING
SPACERS (2X)
CONVENIENCE OUTLET AC
POWER FILTER
BLACK
WHITE
BROWN
GREEN/YELLOW
BLUE
COVER
SCREWS
AC POWER
FILTER COVER
SV20331
Figure 4-15: CONVENIENCE OUTLET AC POWER FILTER
Rev. G
4-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.15.6
Unscrew the two hex post nuts holding the filter to the ventilator box,
and remove the filter.
4.15.7
Install the replacement filter and secure it with the two hex post
nuts.
4.15.8
Connect the AC wiring to the replacement filter. Be sure to observe
the wire color code as illustrated.
4.15.9
Place the safety cover over the filter and secure it with the two
screws.
4.15.10 Remove the prop from the rear of the monitor box, and return the box
to its normal position.
4.15.11 Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.15.12 Restore power to the machine and perform the PMS Procedure given
in Section 6.
4-52
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.16
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Inspiratory Flow Regulator
The inspiratory flow regulator is located in the ventilator box. Access to the
regulator requires removal of the ventilator box front panel, and lifting the
monitor box. Figure 4-16 shows the regulator mounting arrangement and its
connections.
4.16.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.16.2
Remove the four screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
Remove the panel and carefully separate the ventilator switch in-line
connector.
4.16.3
Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
4.16.4
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of this procedure.
Raise the front of the monitor box chassis approximately four inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.16.5
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the regulator.
4.16.6
Remove the tie strap securing the small diameter flex tubing to the
hose barb on the flow regulator assembly, and disconnect the tubing.
4.16.7
Un-screw the retaining ring holding the regulator to its mounting
bracket, and remove the regulator.
4.16.8
Install the replacement regulator in the mounting bracket and
tighten the mounting ring.
4.16.9
Connect the two compression fittings to the regulator.
4.16.10 Reattach the small diameter flex tubing previously removed from the
regulator assembly and secure the connection with a tie strap.
4.16.11 Remove the prop from the front of the monitor box, and return the
box to its normal position.
4.16.12 Replace the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4-53
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
HOSE BARB
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
INSPIRATORY
FLOW
REGULATOR
REGULATOR
MOUNTING NUT
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
SCREWS (4)
SV20341
Figure 4-16: INSPIRATORY FLOW REGULATOR
4-54
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.16.13 Join the ventilator switch in-line connector, and replace the front
panel of the ventilator box.
4.16.14 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.17
NM3
Ventilator Bellows Valve and Guide Assembly
The ventilator bellows valve and guide assembly is located in the bellows box
on the left side of the machine. Access to the valve case and guide assembly
requires that the bellows box front panel and the bellows canister be removed
from the bellows box. The monitor box will also need to be raised for access to
a connection inside the ventilator box.
Replacement Procedure 1 applies to machines with a two-piece tidal volume
adjustment and valve case assembly inside the bellows box. Figure 4-17 shows
the mounting and tubing arrangement.
Replacement Procedure 2 applies to machines with a one-piece tidal volume
adjustment and valve case assembly inside the bellows box. Figure 4-17A
shows the mounting and tubing arrangement for assemblies with either a
Humphrey or a Clippard valve.
Replacement Procedure 1:
4.17.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, remove AC power from
the machine, and disable all circuit breakers.
4.17.2
Close all cylinder valves, and disconnect the pipeline hoses from the
machine.
4.17.3
Press the O2 FLUSH button to relieve pressure from the system.
4.17.4
Adjust the TIDAL VOLUME knob to fully extend the volume
indicator to its minimum setting.
4.17.5
Disconnect the bellows hose and the scavenger hose from the bellows
assembly. Loosen the wingnuts and remove the bellows assembly.
4.17.6
Remove the canister from the bellows box by pulling it downward.
4.17.7
Remove the screws holding the front panel and tidal volume
adjustment knob, and remove the panel. The knob assembly remains
with the panel. On machines with a two-piece panel, remove the
angle plate above the knob panel. (Some older machines may have a
non-removable panel above the bellows adjustment knob.)
4.17.8
Remove the four socket head screws securing the valve case assembly
to the bellows top plate.
4.17.9
Carefully cut the tie strap at the exhaust port (front of valve) and
remove the large hose.
4-56
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VENTILATOR BOX
INSIDE TOP VIEW
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COPPER TUBE
VENTILATOR BOX
AND BELLOWS BOX
FRONT VIEW
FRONT PANEL
MOUNTINGSCREWS (4X)
FRONT PANEL AND TIDAL
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT KNOB
BELLOWS
ASSEMBLY
SV20332
Figure 4-17: TWO-PIECE TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY
Rev. G
4-57
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
BELLOWS BOX FRONT VIEW
WITH PANEL REMOVED
TIE STRAP
EXHAUST
COPPER
TUBE
MINIATURE
ACTUATOR
INTAKE
VALVE CASE
ASSEMBLY
TIE STRAP
VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
SV20312
Figure 4-17: TWO-PIECE TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY (continued)
4-58
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.17.10 Carefully cut the tie strap and remove the other end of the large hose
at the top of the muffler interface wall.
4.17.11 Remove the three socket head screws securing the bellows top plate
to the bellows box.
4.17.12 Carefully cut the tie strap at the intake port (rear of valve) and
remove the large hose.
4.17.13 Disconnect the small diameter tubing from the hose barb on the
bottom of the miniature actuator.
4.17.14 Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of the procedure.
4.17.15 Raise the front of the monitor box chassis approximately four inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.17.16 Disconnect the compression fitting at the outboard end of the copper
tube from the valve case assembly, and remove the valve case
assembly.
4.17.17 Carefully position the replacement valve case assembly in the bellows
box, with the copper tube extending up into the ventilator box, and
connect the compression fitting in the ventilator box.
4.17.18 Connect the small diameter tubing to the hose barb on the bottom of
the miniature actuator and secure the connection with a press-on
clamp.
4.17.19 Attach the large hose to the intake port of the new valve case
assembly and secure it with a new tie strap.
4.17.20 Secure the valve case assembly to the bellows top plate with the four
screws that were previously removed. Be sure that the two O-rings
in the bellows top plate are properly seated.
4.17.21 Secure the bellows top plate to the bellows box using the three screws
that were previously removed.
4-59
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.17.22 Attach the large hose from the muffler interface wall and secure the
connection with a new tie strap.
4.17.23 Attach the other large hose to the exhaust port on the valve case
assembly and secure the connection with a new tie strap.
4.17.24 Remove the prop from the monitor box and carefully lower it into
position. Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator
box.
4.17.25 Place the bellows box front panel into position, ensure that the slot
in the knob assembly is correctly aligned with the drive pin on the
bellows adjustment shaft, and install the four screws holding the
front panel to the machine.
4.17.26 Reattach the canister to the bellows box.
4.17.27 Reattach the bellows assembly and tighten the wingnuts holding it
in place. Connect any hoses that were previously removed from the
bellows assembly.
4.17.28 Reconnect the pipeline hoses and AC power cord, and reset all circuit
breakers.
4.17.29 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-60
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Replacement Procedure 2:
4.17.30 Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, remove AC power from
the machine, and disable all circuit breakers.
4.17.31 Close all cylinder valves, and disconnect the pipeline hoses from the
machine.
4.17.32 Press the O2 FLUSH button to relieve pressure from the system.
4.17.33 Adjust the TIDAL VOLUME knob to fully extend the volume
indicator to its minimum setting.
4.17.34 Disconnect the bellows hose and the scavenger hose from the bellows
assembly. Loosen the wingnuts and remove the bellows assembly and
the canister.
4.17.35 Remove the canister from the bellows box by pulling it downward.
4.17.36 Remove the screws holding the front panel and tidal volume
adjustment knob, and remove the panel. The knob assembly remains
with the panel. On machines with a two-piece panel, remove the
angle plate above the knob panel.
4.17.37 Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of the procedure.
4.17.38 Raise the front of the monitor box chassis approximately four inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.17.39 Remove the bellows guide by unscrewing its stem from the bellows
adjustment rod.
4.17.40 Remove the volume indicator from the bellows adjustment rod by
loosening its two set screws. Note the position of the indicator on the
rod so that it can be reassembled in the same manner.
4.17.41 Remove the screws securing the muffler access panel at the rear of
the bellows box, and remove the panel.
4-61
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
VENTILATOR BOX
INSIDE TOP VIEW
VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
"OUT" PORT
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COPPER TUBE
VENTILATOR BOX
AND BELLOWS BOX
FRONT VIEW
FRONT PANEL
MOUNTINGSCREWS (4X)
BELLOWS
ASSEMBLY
FRONT PANEL AND TIDAL
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT KNOB
BELLOWS
ASSEMBLY
VOLUME INDICATOR
SET SCREWS (2X)
VOLUME INDICATOR
SV20333
Figure 4-17A: ONE-PIECE TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY
4-62
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
ASSEMBLY WITH
CLIPPARD VALVE
ASSEMBLY WITH
HUMPHREY VALVE
BELLOWS BOX
INSIDE TOP VIEW
INTAKE
HOSE
EXHAUST
HOSE
HOSE
CLAMP (2X)
BELLOWS TOP
PLATE MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
COPPER TUBE
BELLOWS
ADJUSTING
ROD TUBE
BELLOWS VALVE
AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
BELLOWS BOX FRONT VIEW
WITH PANEL REMOVED
TO VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
TO VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
BELLOWS
TOP PLATE
VALVE AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
SV45016
Figure 4-17A: ONE-PIECE TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY (continued)
4-63
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.17.42 Remove the muffler/silencer (white tube) from the intake flange at
the interface wall by turning the muffler counter-clockwise.
4.17.43 Disconnect the press-on clamp and small diameter tubing from the
left side hose barb on the ventilator solenoid valve (port labeled
"out").
4.17.44 Disconnect the compression fitting at the outboard end of the copper
tube from the valve case assembly.
4.17.45 Unscrew the bellows adjustment rod tube from the top of the
assembly. Do not misplace the spacer ring.
4.17.46 Pull the bellows adjustment rod up.
4.17.47 Remove the two screws securing the valve case and guide assembly
to the bellows top plate.
NOTE:
Be careful not to misplace the two O-rings and the spacer
ring under the valve case assembly.
4.17.48 Pull both large diameter tubes forward until they clear the muffler
housing interface wall.
4.17.49 Rotate the valve case and guide assembly as needed in order to
withdraw it from the bellows box.
CAUTION: Do not damage any of the fittings or small hose barbs on
the assembly during its removal.
4.17.50 Transfer the large diameter tubing and hose clamps to the intake and
exhaust ports on the replacement valve case and guide assembly.
4.17.51 Carefully position the replacement valve case and guide assembly in
the bellows box, with the copper tube extending up into the ventilator
box, and with the intake and exhaust hoses correctly positioned in the
muffler housing interface wall.
4.17.52 Secure the valve case assembly to the bellows top plate with the two
screws that were previously removed. Be sure that the spacer ring
and the two O-rings in the bellows top plate are properly seated.
4-64
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.17.53 Connect the copper tube to the tee fitting in the ventilator box.
4.17.54 Install the spacer ring and bellows adjustment rod tube at the top of
the valve case and guide assembly.
4.17.55 Attach the small diameter tubing from the miniature actuator to the
left side hose barb on the ventilator solenoid valve (port labeled
"out"), and secure the connection with a press-on clamp.
NOTE:
After the connection is made, ensure that there are no
kinks or sharp bends in the tubing.
4.17.56 Reattach the muffler/silencer to the intake flange at the muffler
housing interface, and reattach the rear access panel using the screws
that were previously removed.
4.17.57 Install the volume indicator on the bellows adjustment rod in the
same position as before disassembly, and tighten its two setscrews.
4.17.58 Install the bellows guide by screwing its stem into the bellows
adjustment rod. Secure it with #222 (purple) Loctite.
4.17.59 Remove the prop from the monitor box and carefully lower it into
position. Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator
box.
4.17.60 Place the bellows box front panel into position, ensure that the slot
in the knob assembly is correctly aligned with the drive pin on the
bellows adjustment shaft, and install the four screws holding the
front panel to the machine.
4.17.61 Replace the bellows assembly and tighten the wingnuts holding it in
place. Connect any hoses that were previously removed from the
bellows assembly.
4.17.62 Reconnect the pipeline hoses and AC power cord, and reset all circuit
breakers.
4.17.63 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-65
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.18
NM3
Alarm Channel
Replacement of the alarm circuit board or the system power switch assembly
requires that the alarm channel be removed from the machine. The top of the
alarm channel is held in place by the cover plate which also retains the
flowmeter shield. On later models the vapor box cover plate is extended to also
cover the flowmeter shield and alarm channel. The bottom of the alarm
channel is held by a screw from the back. Access to the bottom mounting screw
and the alarm channel connections requires removal of the rear cover. Figure
4-18 shows a rear view of the alarm channel and the arrangement of the
circuit board assembly and system power switch.
4.18.1
Disconnect the pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.
4.18.2
Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.18.3
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.18.4
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.18.5
Remove the screws holding the table top, and lift out the table top.
CAUTION: The circuit board contains static sensitive devices. Use
ESD protection when handling this assembly.
4.18.6
Disconnect the cables from J1, J2, J3 and J4 on the alarm circuit
board.
WARNING:
4.18.7
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before disconnecting the cables. Failure
to observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the system power switch
valve.
4.18.8A Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
angled cover plate at the top of the channel. Hold the cover plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.18.8B Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover, and remove
the panel.
4.18.9
Feed the flowmeter lights wire harness through the hole at the top of
the alarm channel.
4-66
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
J2
J1
J3
J4
COMPRESSION
FITTINGS
ALARM
P.C. BOARD
P.C. BOARD
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4)
SYSTEM
POWER
SWITCH
FLEXIBLE O2
CONNECTION
ALARM CHANNEL
BOTTOM MOUNTING
SCREW
SV20340
Figure 4-18: ALARM PANEL AND SYSTEM POWER SWITCH
4-67
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.18.10 Remove the bottom alarm channel mounting screw. If the machine
does not have an auxiliary O2 flow meter, proceed to Step 4.18.12.
4.18.11 If the machine is equipped with an auxiliary O2 flow meter,pull the
alarm channel forward far enough to gain access to the system power
switch valve, cut the tie-wrap clamp on the flexible tube at the valve,
and remove the tube from the valve.
4.18.12 Connect the flexible tube to the system power switch valve on the
replacement alarm channel and install a new tie-wrap clamp.
4.18.13 Set the replacement alarm channel in position and connect the two
compression fittings to the system power switch valve. Do not tighten
the fittings yet.
4.18.14 Reinstall the bottom alarm channel mounting screw.
4.18.15 Feed the flowmeter lights wire harness connector through the hole at
the top of the alarm channel.
4.18.16 Reinstall the cover plate at the top of the channel and secure it with
the hardware that was previously removed.
4.18.17 Tighten the two compression fittings at the system power switch
valve and perform the following leak test:
4.18.17.1
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and allow the pressure to
stabilize.
4.18.17.2
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.18.17.3
The pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes. (The cylinder pressure must be at least 1000
psi for this test.)
4.18.18 Connect the cables that were previously removed from J1, J2, J3 and
J4 on the alarm circuit board.
4.18.19 Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.18.20 Replace the table top and its mounting screws.
4.18.21 Connect the pipeline hoses and restore AC power to the machine.
4.18.22 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-68
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.19
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Multispec Analyzer
The Multispec Analyzer comprises two assemblies: an analyzer and pump
assembly located at the back of the machine, and a PCB assembly located
within the monitor housing. The analyzer and pump assembly contains several
field-replaceable items. These are: the fan, the scrubber bottle, the pump, and
the sample cell. If the entire analyzer and pump assembly is replaced, then the
PCB assembly must also be replaced as these two items are supplied as a
matched set for calibration purposes. Figure 4-19 shows the Multispec
Analyzer arrangement and its connections.
NOTE: For installations with a 4610 ugrade, refer to the latest version of
NAD Service Procedure SP00121.
4.19.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
CAUTION:
4.19.2
Rev. B
The circuit boards in the multispec assemblies contain static
sensitive devices. Use ESD protection when handling these
assemblies.
Analyzer and Pump Assembly:
4.19.2.1
Remove the two screws at the top of the back cover, and
open the cover.
NOTE:
The following procedure applies to replacement of the
entire analyzer and pump assembly. Procedures for
replacement of sub-assemblies begin at Paragraph
4.19.10.
4.19.2.2
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J2 on the optical head
circuit board.
4.19.2.3
Disconnect the exhaust line from the lower port on the
pump.
4.19.2.4
Disconnect the sample line from the solenoid valve.
4.19.2.5
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J1 on the pump
controller board.
4.19.2.6
Loosen the four captive mounting screws holding the
analyzer and pump assembly to the bottom of the
ventilator box, and remove the assembly.
4.19.2.7
Hold the replacement assembly in place and tighten its
captive mounting screws.
4-69
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
J1 (TO MULTISPEC
MONITOR J1)
J2 (TO ANALYZER PUMP
CONTROLLER BOARD J1)
FRONT (INSIDE) VIEW OF
ANALYZER PCB ASSEMBLY
XXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXX
XXX
XXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
J3 (FROM
MULTISPEC
POWER SUPPLY J3)
J5
J4
J9 (TO VAPOR
IND. PCB J1)
(FROM MULTISPEC POWER
SUPPLY J2 AND J4)
ANALYZER PCB ASSEMBLY
J1
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
PUMP EXHAUST
LINE
J1
J2
NARKOMED 3 REAR VIEW
ANALYZER AND
PUMP ASSEMBLY
SAMPLE LINE
CONNECTION
SCRUBBER BOTTLE
SV30019
Figure 4-19: MULTISPEC ANALYZER CONNECTIONS
4-70
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW OF ANALYZER
WITH HINGED COVER OPEN
SAMPLE
CELL
PUMP WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
PUMP ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
TUBING
PUMP ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
SAMPLE HOSE
J3
COVER HINGE
SCREWS (2X)
SCRUBBER
BOTTLE CLIP
FAN MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
FAN
REAR COVER
SCREWS (2X)
SV30099
Figure 4-19 (continued): MULTISPEC ANALYZER SUBASSEMBLIES
4-71
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.3
NM3
4.19.2.8
Connect the 16-wire ribbon cable to J1 on the pump
controller board.
4.19.2.9
Connect the sample line to the solenoid valve.
4.19.2.10
Connect the exhaust line to the lower port on the pump.
4.19.2.11
Connect the 40-wire ribbon cable to J2 on the optical
head circuit board.
PCB Assembly:
4.19.3.1
Disconnect any cables from the serial interface ports at
the back of the machine.
4.19.3.2
Remove the two screws holding the back panel of the
monitor housing, and open the hinged back panel.
4.19.3.3
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and
disconnect its ground wire.
4.19.3.4
Loosen the four captive mounting screws holding the
PCB assembly to the floor of the monitor housing.
4.19.3.5
Disconnect the 40-wire ribbon cable from J1 on the back
board of the assembly.
4.19.3.6
Disconnect the 16-wire ribbon cable from J2.
4.19.3.7
Disconnect the monitor cable from J1.
4.19.3.8
Disconnect the power supply cable from J3.
4.19.3.9
Disconnect the vapor selection indicator cable from J9.
4.19.3.10
Disconnect the power supply wiring harness cables from
J4 and J5.
4.19.3.11
Remove the PCB Assembly, and position the replacement
PCB Assembly in the monitor housing.
4.19.3.12
Re-connect the cables that were previously removed from
J4, J5, J9, J3, J1, and J2.
4.19.3.13
Re-connect the 40-wire ribbon cable to J1 on the back
board of the assembly.
4.19.3.14
Secure the PCB Assembly to the floor of the monitor
housing with the four captive mounting screws.
4-72
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.4
Restore power to the machine and perform the multispec calibration
procedures given in Section 5.
NOTE: If the entire analyzer is replaced or if the pump is replaced, the pump
flow rate must be set to the correct value as described in Section 5.
4.19.5
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.19.6
Reinstall the top shelf of the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.19.7
Close the back panel of the monitor housing and replace the two
retaining screws. Re-connect any cables that were previously
disconnected from the serial interface ports.
4.19.8
Close the cover of the analyzer and pump assembly, and replace the
two retaining screws.
4.19.9
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-73
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.19.10 Fan Replacement:
4.19.10.1
Remove the two screws securing the back cover of the
analyzer and pump assembly, and open the hinged cover.
4.19.10.2
Disconnect the fan wire harness from J3 on the pump
controller circuit board.
4.19.10.3
Remove the four fan mounting screws, and remove the
fan.
4.19.10.4
Install the replacement fan. Use a small amount of loctite
#222 (purple) on the mounting screw threads.
4.19.10.5
Connect the fan wire harness to J3 on the pump
controller circuit board.
4.19.10.6
Proceed to Paragraph 4.19.4.
4.19.11 Scrubber Bottle Replacement:
4.19.11.1
Disconnect the inlet line at the hose barb on the bottle.
4.19.11.2
Remove the bottle from its retainer clip.
4.19.11.3
Install the replacement scrubber bottle in the retainer
clip.
4.19.11.4
Connect the inlet line to the hose barb on the bottle.
4.19.11.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.19.4.
4.19.12 Pump Replacement: (See 4.19.14 for Model 4610 pump replacement)
4.19.12.1
Remove the analyzer and pump assembly from the
machine as outlined in Paragraphs 4.19.2.2 thru 4.19.2.6.
4.19.12.2
Separate the in-line pump wire harness connector.
4.19.12.3
Disconnect the tubing from the intake port on the pump.
4.19.12.4
Remove the three screws holding the pump to its
mounting bracket, and remove the pump.
4.19.12.5
Secure the replacement pump to the mounting bracket
with the three screws that were previously replaced.
4.19.12.6
Connect the previously removed tubing to the intake port
on the replacement pump.
4-74
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.12.7
Join the in-line pump wire harness connector.
4.19.12.8
Reinstall the analyzer and pump assembly to the bottom
of the ventilator box, and tighten the four captive
mounting screws.
4.19.12.9
Connect the 16-wire ribbon cable to J1 on the pump
controller board.
4.19.12.10 Connect the sample line to the solenoid valve.
4.19.12.11 Connect the exhaust line to the lower port on the pump.
4.19.12.12 Connect the 40-wire ribbon cable to J2 on the optical
head circuit board.
4.19.12.13 Proceed to Paragraph 4.19.4.
4.19.13 Sample Cell Replacement:
4.19.13.1
Remove the analyzer and pump assembly from the
machine as outlined in Paragraphs 4.19.2.2 thru 4.19.2.6.
4.19.13.2
Disconnect the fan wire harness from J3 on the pump
controller circuit board.
4.19.13.3
Disconnect the hose from the scrubber bottle and remove
the scrubber bottle.
4.19.13.4
Remove the two hinge screws and nuts holding the
analyzer and pump assembly cover, and remove the
cover.
4.19.13.5
Disconnect the elbow tubing from the left side hose barb
of the sample cell.
4.19.13.6
Disconnect the sample hose from the right side hose barb
of the sample cell.
4.19.13.7
Turn the thumbscrew of the sample cell counterclockwise until its locking tab releases.
4.19.13.8
Carefully lift the sample cell from its chamber.
4-75
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.13.9
NM3
Install the replacement sample cell in the chamber, with
the locking tab on the thumbscrew pointing to the left.
Lock the cell in place by applying a slight downward
pressure to the top of the cell while turning the
thumbscrew clockwise.
4.19.13.10 Connect the sample hose to the right side hose barb of
the sample cell.
4.19.13.11 Connect the elbow tubing to the left side hose barb of the
sample cell.
4.19.13.12 Reinstall the cover with the two hinge screws and nuts.
4.19.13.13 Reinstall the scrubber bottle and connect the hose that
was previously removed from the scrubber bottle.
4.19.13.14 Connect the fan wire harness to J3 on the pump
controller board.
4.19.13.15 Reinstall the analyzer and pump assembly to the bottom
of the ventilator box, and tighten the four captive
mounting screws.
4.19.13.16 Connect the 16-wire ribbon cable to J1 on the pump
controller board.
4.19.13.17 Connect the sample line to the solenoid valve.
4.19.13.18 Connect the exhaust line to the lower port on the pump.
4.19.13.19 Connect the 40-wire ribbon cable to J2 on the optical
head circuit board.
4.19.13.20 Proceed to Paragraph 4.19.4.
4-76
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.14 Pump Replacement: Model 4610
4.19.14.1
Disconnect the Andros 34-conductor ribbon cable at P1 in
the monitor housing.
4.19.14.2
Disconnect the exhaust line from the hose barb on the
variable restrictor. See Figure 2.
4.19.14.3
Disconnect the sample line from the T-fitting hose barb
as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION: Refer to TSB #114 for the next step.
4.19.14.4
Locate the elbow on the end of the tubing that comes
from the tee fitting in the pump intake line. Disconnect
this elbow at the one inch piece of tubing attached to the
Andros board on the front of the PCB assembly. See
Figure 3.
4.19.14.5
Disconnect the pump cable from J1 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.6
Disconnect the solenoid cable from J14 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.7
Disconnect the fan cable from J8 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.8
Feed the solenoid, pump and fan cables down into the
analyzer and pump assembly housing.
4.19.14.9
Loosen the four captive mounting screws (ref. Figure 2)
and separate the analyzer & pump assembly from the
machine.
4.19.14.10 Place the analyzer & pump assembly on an ESD-safe
surface.
4.19.14.11 Disconnect the intake and exhaust hoses at the pump.
4.19.14.12 Loosen the three pump bracket mounting screws; remove
the pump and bracket from the analyzer housing.
4.19.14.13 Remove the pump from the mounting bracket by
disconnecting the four springs.
4.19.14.14 Attach the replacement pump (P/N 4112578-001) to the
mounting bracket by attaching the four springs.
Rev. B
4-76A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
P NEUMAT I C CO NNE CT I O N TO
ANDRO S BO A RD O N PCB ASS EM BLY
SAMPLE LINE
CONNECTION
CAPTIVE
M OUNT I NG
SCREW S (4 X)
P UM P
A ND RO S
CAB LE
EX HAU ST
CONNECTION
FAN
VARIABLE
RESTRICTOR
REAR VIEW OF ANALYZER AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
WITH COVER OPEN
SP 1 4 3 0 2
Figure 19A: ANALYZER AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
4-76B
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
PNEUMATIC CONNECTION
AND ROS
BOA RD
P1
P2
CAPTIVE
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
F RO NT V I E W
SOLENOID
J14
J8
J1
J7
J16
J18
J15
MUL TISPEC
POW ER
SUP PL Y
CONNECT IONS
FAN
P UM P
J13
GAI BOARD
POWER
W I RE HARNE SS
ADAPTER
ADAPTER
CABLE
MONITOR CABLE
S P1 4 3 0 3
R EA R VI EW
Figure 19B: ANALYZER PCB ASSEMBLY
Rev. B
4-76C
VAPOR
INDICATOR
LIGHTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.19.14.15 Position the pump and bracket inside the analyzer
housing, and reinstall the bracket with the three screws
that were previously removed.
4.19.14.16 Connect the tube from the T-fitting to the inlet side of
the pump, and secure the connection with the hose
clamp.
4.19.14.17 Connect the tube from the flow restrictor to the exhaust
side of the pump, and secure the connection with the
hose clamp.
4.19.14.18 Position the analyzer & pump assembly at the back of
the machine, and tighten the four captive mounting
screws to secure the assembly to the machine. Ref.
Figure 2.
4.19.14.19 Feed the solenoid, pump and fan cables from the analyzer
& pump assembly up into the monitor housing.
4.19.14.20 Connect the fan cable to J8 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.21 Connect the solenoid cable to J14 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.22 Connect the pump cable to J1 on the GAI board.
4.19.14.23 Locate the elbow on the end of the tubing that comes
from the tee fitting in the pump intake line. Connect this
elbow to the one inch piece of tubing attached to the
Andros board on the front of the PCB assembly.
4.19.14.24 Connect the sample line to the T-fitting hose barb as
shown in Figure 2.
4.19.14.25 Connect the exhaust line to the hose barb on the variable
restrictor.
4.19.14.26 Feed the Andros 34-conductor ribbon cable up into the
monitor housing and connect it to the Andros board on
the PCB assembly.
4.19.14.27 Close the analyzer & pump assembly cover and the NM3
covers, and reinstall all retaining screws.
4.19.14.28 Proceed to Step 4.19.4.
4-76D
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.20
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
ECC (Serial Interface) Module
The ECC Module is mounted on the inside back cover of the monitor housing,
with its five serial port connectors accessible from the underside of the back
cover. Figure 4-20 shows the mounting arrangement and location of the data
and power cable connections to the module.
4.20.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.20.2
Disconnect any cables connected to the serial interface ports.
4.20.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the ECC module contain static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling this module.
4.20.4
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J4 on the ECC module.
4.20.5
Disconnect the wiring harness from J3 on the ECC module.
4.20.6
Remove the ground wire connection from the back cover.
4.20.7
Close the monitor housing back cover and remove the four screws
holding the ECC module to the cover.
4.20.8
Open the back cover and remove the module.
4.20.9
Position the replacement module inside the back cover, and raise the
cover far enough to allow threading the mounting screws into the
module. Close the back cover and tighten the mounting screws.
4.20.10 Open the back cover and connect the data and power cables to J4 and
J3 on the ECC module.
4.20.11 Connect the ground wire to the back cover.
4.20.12 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.20.13 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-77
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
J4 (TO CCC
ASSEMBLY J12)
J3 (POWER)
NARKOMED 3 SIDE VIEW OF MONITOR
HOUSING WITH REAR COVER OPEN
GROUND
WIRE
CONNECTION
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
SV30020
Figure 4-20: ECC (SERIAL INTERFACE) MODULE
4-78
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.21
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Sphygmomed Module
The Sphygmomed Module is located inside the ventilator box as shown in
Figure 4-21. Access to the module requires disconnecting cables from the
Multispec PCB assembly in the monitor housing, and raising the monitor
housing to provide clearance for removing the module.
4.21.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.21.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.21.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.21.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the sphygmomed module and the multispec
PCB assembly contain static sensitive devices. Use ESD
protection when handling these assemblies.
4.21.5
Loosen the captive mounting screws on the multispec PCB assembly,
disconnect all of the cables attached to the assembly, and remove the
PCB assembly from the monitor housing. (Ref.: 4.19, Multispec
Analyzer)
4.21.6
Remove the screws holding the monitor housing to the ventilator box.
4.21.7
Raise the back of the monitor housing and prop it open far enough to
gain access to the sphygmomed module.
4.21.8
Disconnect the monitor cable from J3 on the sphygmomed module,
and disconnect the power supply cable from J1.
4.21.9
Remove the ground wire connection from the floor of the ventilator
box.
4.21.10 Disconnect the cuff tubing at the in-line hose connector.
4.21.11 Remove the two screws holding the sphygmomed module. These
screws are accessible from the bottom of the ventilator box. Lift the
module from the ventilator box.
4-79
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
J2
J1
XXX
XXX.
XXX
GROUND WIRE
CONNECTION
J3 (TO
SPHYGMOMED
MONITOR J1)
J1 (FROM POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BLOCK TB9 AND TB20)
BP CUFF
CONNECTION
SV30021
Figure 4-21: SPHYGMOMED MODULE
4-80
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.21.12 Position the replacement sphygmomed module in the ventilator box
and secure it with the two mounting screws that were previously
removed.
4.21.13 Connect the cuff tubing at the in-line hose connector.
4.21.14 Connect the ground wire to the floor of the ventilator box.
4.21.15 Connect the power and monitor cables to J1 and J3 on the
replacement module.
4.21.16 Carefully remove the prop and lower the monitor housing into place.
Reinstall the screws holding the monitor housing to the ventilator
box.
4.21.17 Reinstall the multispec PCB assembly by connecting the cables that
were previously removed and securing it to the monitor housing.
4.21.18 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.21.19 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.21.20 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-81
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.22
NM3
Monitors (Typical)
The six separate monitors have a similar backplane mounting and electrical
connection arrangement. The Baromed monitor also has a pneumatic sensor
connection which is detailed in Figure 4-22. Access to the top two monitors
(O2Med and Baromed) requires removal of the monitor housing top shelf.
Access to the other monitors requires removal of the Multispec PCB assembly
from the monitor housing.
4.22.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.22.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.22.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.22.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the monitors contain static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling these assemblies.
NOTE: For the Baromed monitor and the O2Med monitor, proceed to
Paragraph 4.22.7.
4.22.5
Loosen the captive mounting screws on the multispec PCB assembly,
disconnect all of the cables attached to the assembly, and remove the
PCB assembly from the monitor housing. (Ref.: 4.19, Multispec
Analyzer)
4.22.6
Disconnect the ribbon cable that crosses over the top of the monitors
from J1 on the trend/CRT controller PCB, to J3 on the CCC/main
PCB.
4.22.7
Disconnect the input cable from J1 on the back of the monitor being
removed.
For the Baromed monitor, disconnect the pneumatic sensor line at the
90° fitting as shown in the illustration. Be careful not to damage the
hose barb on the monitor.
4.22.8
At the front panel, remove the left or right monitor bezel by carefully
prying its top tab outward, and lifting the bezel out of the panel.
4-82
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NARKOMED 3 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
BAROMED
MONITOR
O2MED
MONITOR
SENSOR CONNECTION
(BAROMED MONITOR ONLY)
DISCONNECT
90
HOSE CONNECTOR
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREW (TYP)
CABLE
CONNECTOR
(TYP)
TAB
FRONT PANEL
MONITOR
BEZEL
SV30022
Figure 4-22: MONITOR REPLACEMENT (TYPICAL)
4-83
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.22.9
NM3
Loosen the captive mounting screw holding the monitor to the
backplane. Carefully press on the back edge of the monitor chassis
with a screwdriver to un-plug the monitor from the backplane, and
withdraw the monitor from the front panel.
4.22.10 Slide the replacement monitor through the front panel and press it
firmly into its backplane connector.
4.22.11 Tighten the captive mounting screw on the backplane.
4.22.12 Reinstall the monitor bezel in the front panel, making sure that its
index tab is properly seated in the panel.
4.22.13 Connect the input cable to J1 on the monitor.
For the Baromed monitor, connect the pneumatic sensor line.
4.22.14 If applicable, reinstall the ribbon cable from J3 on the CCC/main PCB
to J1 on the trend/CRT controller PCB.
4.22.15 If applicable, reinstall the multispec PCB assembly by connecting the
cables that were previously removed and securing it to the monitor
housing.
4.22.16 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.22.17 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.22.18 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-84
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.23
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Trend Assembly
The Trend assembly is located near the center of the monitor housing and
comprises two circuit boards: the CRT controller PCB and the MUX junction
PCB. Figure 4-23 shows the external connections to each circuit board and the
mounting arrangement of the assembly.
4.23.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.23.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.23.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.23.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the trend assembly contain static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling this assembly.
4.23.5
Disconnect the power cable from J5 on the CRT controller PCB.
4.23.6
Disconnect the ground wire from the monitor housing chassis.
4.23.7
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J1 on the CRT controller PCB.
4.23.8
Disconnect the following cables from the MUX junction PCB: J1, J3,
J5, J7 and J8.
4.23.9
Loosen the captive mounting screws holding the assembly to the floor
of the monitor housing.
4.23.10 Carefully lift the assembly far enough to gain access to the data CRT
keypad cable connected to J2 on the MUX junction PCB. Disconnect
the cable and remove the trend assembly.
4-85
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
DATA CRT
KEYPAD CABLE
CAPTIVE MOUNTING SCREW
SV30024
CAPTIVE
MOUNTING SCREW
J5 (FROM POWER
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
TB5, TB12, TB18)
J1 (FROM CCC
MAIN PCB J3)
GROUND WIRE
CONNECTION
J1 (FROM SYSTEM
CONTROL KEYPAD)
J3 (TO DATA CRT J7)
J5 (TO
DATA
CRT J3)
MUX
JUCTION PCB
CRT
CONTROLLER PCB
J7 (TO DATA CRT
LOWER PCB P2)
Figure 4-23: TREND ASSEMBLY
4-86
J2 (FROM DATA
CRT KEYPAD)
J8 (TO DATA CRT
J2 AND ALARM CRT J2)
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.23.11 Connect the data CRT keypad cable to J2 on the MUX junction PCB
of the replacement trend assembly, and secure the assembly to the
floor of the monitor housing with the two captive mounting screws.
4.23.12 Connect the previously removed cables to the following points on the
MUX junction PCB:
J1 (from system control keypad)
J3 (to data CRT J7)
J5 (to data CRT J3)
J7 (to data CRT P2)
J8 (to data CRT J2 and alarm CRT J2)
4.23.13 Connect the ground wire to the monitor housing chassis.
4.23.14 Connect the previously removed cables to the following points on the
CRT controller PCB:
J1 (from CCC main PCB J3)
J5 (power)
4.23.15 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.23.16 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.23.17 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-87
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.24
NM3
CCC (Central Communication Controller) Assembly
The CCC assembly is located in the monitor housing between the monitors and
the outside wall of the housing. The assembly comprises two circuit boards: the
main PCB and the interface PCB. Figure 4-24 shows the external connections
to each circuit board and the mounting arrangement of the assembly.
4.24.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.24.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.24.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.24.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the CCC assembly contain static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling this assembly.
4.24.5
Disconnect the power cable from J10 on the main PCB.
4.24.6
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J12 on the main PCB.
4.24.7
Disconnect the ground wire from the monitor housing.
4.24.8
Loosen the captive mounting screws holding the assembly to the floor
of the monitor housing.
4.24.9
Carefully lift the assembly and disconnect the ribbon cables from J3,
J4, J5, and J7 on the main PCB.
4.24.10 Disconnect the backplane cables from J2 and J3 on the interface PCB,
and remove the assembly.
4-88
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NARKOMED 3 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
CAPTIVE
MOUNTING
SCREWS
GROUND WIRE
CONNECTION
SV30025
J3 (TO TREND/CRT CONTROLLER PCB J1)
J4 (TO DATA CRT ASSEMBLY J1)
J5 (TO ALARM CRT ASSEMBLY J1)
J7 (TO ALARM CHANNEL
VENTILATOR BOX
CONNECTOR)
J10 (FROM POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BLOCK TB13 AND TB19)
J12 (FROM ECC MODULE)
J2 (TO BACKPLANE "B", J4)
CCC MAIN PCB
J3 (TO BACKPLANE "A", J4)
CCC INTERFACE PCB
Figure 4-24: CCC ASSEMBLY
4-89
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.24.11 Connect the backplane cables to the replacement CCC assembly
interface PCB as follows:
J2 (to backplane "B" J4)
J3 (to backplane "A" J4)
4.24.12 Connect the previously removed cables to the following points on the
main PCB:
J7 (alarm channel cable to ventilator box connector)
J3 (to trend/CRT controller PCB J1)
J4 (to data CRT assembly J1)
J5 (to alarm CRT assembly J1)
4.24.13 Secure the assembly to the floor of the monitor housing with the two
captive mounting screws.
4.24.14 Connect the ribbon cable from the ECC module to J12 on the main
PCB.
4.24.15 Connect the ground wire to the monitor housing chassis.
4.24.16 Connect the power cable to J10 on the main PCB.
4.24.17 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.24.18 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.24.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-90
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.25
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
CRT Assemblies
The location and mounting arrangement for the data CRT and the alarm CRT
is shown Figure 4-25, along with the electrical connections for each CRT
assembly.
4.25.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.25.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.25.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.25.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The circuit boards in the CRT assemblies contain static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling these assemblies.
4.25.5
Disconnect the power cable from J5.
4.25.6
Disconnect the ground wire.
4.25.7
Disconnect the ribbon cables from J1 and J2 on both CRT assemblies.
4.25.8
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J3 (data CRT only).
4.25.9
Disconnect the ribbon cable from P2 on the lower CRT circuit board
(data CRT only).
4.25.10 Disconnect the cable from J7.
NOTE: On the alarm CRT, this cable is part of the alarm CRT keypad. Mark
the cable connector and note the routing of this cable so that it can
be connected to the replacement CRT assembly in the same manner.
4.25.11 Remove the two mounting screws and washers at the back of the CRT
assembly. Slide the assembly back and carefully lift it from the
monitor housing.
4-91
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
DATA
CRT
ALARM CRT
KEYPAD CABLE
ALARM
CRT
DATA CRT EXTERNAL CABLE DESTINATIONS
J1
J2
J3
P2
J5
J7
CCC/
TREND/
TREND/
TREND/
TB7
TREND/
MAIN
MUX
MUX
MUX
TB15
MUX
J4
J8
J5
J7
TB22
J3
ALARM CRT EXTERNAL CABLE DESTINATIONS
CRT ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
SCREWS (TYP)
J1
J2
CCC/
J5
J7
TREND/
TB6
ALARM
MAIN
MUX
TB16
CRT
J5
J8
TB23
KEYPAD
GROUND WIRE
CONNECTION (TYP)
J3
P2
J1
J2
J3 (DATA CRT ONLY)
SIDE VIEW OF CRT ASSEMBLY
J5
P2 (DATA CRT ONLY)
J7
SV30026
Figure 4-25: ALARM AND DATA CRT ASSEMBLIES
4-92
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.25.12 Carefully lower the replacement CRT assembly into place. For the
alarm CRT, ensure that the alarm CRT keypad cable is routed
properly.
4.25.13 Slide the CRT assembly forward, and reinstall the mounting screws
and washers.
4.25.14 Connect the cables that were previously removed from J7, P2, J3, J1,
J2, and J5 according to the cable destination schedule in the
illustration.
4.25.15 Connect the ground wire.
4.25.16 Restore power to the machine and observe the display for correct size,
centering, contrast, brightness and focus. Refer to the video
adjustment procedure given in Section 5 if necessary.
4.25.17 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.25.18 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.25.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-93
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.26
NM3
Keypads
The data CRT, alarm CRT and system control keypads are held to the front
bezel by self adhesive. Replacement of any keypad requires removal of the
trend assembly, and removal of both CRT assemblies for access to the back of
the bezel. Figure 4-26 shows the keypad cable and ground strap arrangement
along with bezel assembly details.
4.26.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.26.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
4.26.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
4.26.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
CAUTION:
The trend assembly and the CRT assemblies contain static
sensitive devices. Use ESD protection when handling these
assemblies.
4.26.5
Disconnect all of the cables attached to the CRT assemblies, and
remove both CRT assemblies. (Ref.: 4.25, CRT Assemblies)
4.26.6
Disconnect the cables attached to the trend assembly, and loosen its
captive mounting screws. (Ref.: 4.23, Trend Assembly)
4.26.7
Remove the four screws holding the retainer plate to the back of the
bezel, and remove the retainer plate.
4.26.8
Remove the screw from the system control keypad ground strap.
4.26.9
Carefully remove the filter panel with the system control keypad from
the back of the bezel.
4.26.10 For replacement of the system control keypad, carefully separate the
keypad from the filter panel and install a new keypad in its place.
For replacement of the CRT keypads, remove the ground strap screw
and carefully pry the keypad from the front of the bezel. Feed the
replacement keypad ground strap and cable through the bezel
openings, press the keypad into place and reinstall the ground strap
screw.
4-94
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SYSTEM
CONTROL
KEYPAD
DATA CRT KEYPAD
ALARM CRT KEYPAD
TOP VIEW OF
FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY
GROUND
STRAP
GROUND
STRAP
TO TREND/MUX J2
TO TREND/MUX J1
TO ALARM
CRT J7
REAR VIEW OF FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
FILTER
RETAINER PLATE
RETAINER PLATE SCREWS (4x)
SV30027
Figure 4-26: SYSTEM CONTROL AND CRT KEYPADS
4-95
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
4.26.11 Position the filter panel and system control keypad in the bezel, and
reinstall the retainer plate and its four screws.
4.26.12 Reinstall the system control keypad ground strap screw.
4.26.13 Reinstall the trend assembly by connecting the cables that were
previously removed, and securing the assembly to the monitor
housing.
4.26.14 Reinstall the CRT assemblies in the monitor housing, and connect the
cables that were previously removed.
4.26.15 Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
4.26.16 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
4.26.17 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-96
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.27
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Pulse Oximeter Module
The Pulse Oximeter Module is located in the right side of the ventilator box.
Access to the module requires removal of the ventilator box front panel. Figure
4-27 shows the pulse oximeter module mounting arrangement and connections.
4.27.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.27.2
Remove the six screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
4.27.3
Carefully remove the ventilator box front panel and separate the
ventilator switch in-line connector.
4.27.4
Remove the two screws holding the pulse oximeter module to the floor
of the ventilator box.
4.27.5
Disconnect the power, sensor interface, and monitor cables, and
remove the pulse oximeter module.
4.27.6
Position the replacement module in the ventilator box and connect
the previously removed cables as follows:
J1 upper board (to SaO2 monitor)
J2 upper board (power)
J2 lower board (from SaO2 interface panel)
4.27.7
Secure the module to the floor of the ventilator box with the screws
that were previously removed.
4.27.8
Carefully join the ventilator switch in-line connector, and reinstall the
ventilator box front panel. Be sure that the drive pin on the
inspiratory flow regulator is correctly aligned with the knob assembly.
4.27.9
Reinstall the six screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
4.27.10 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-97
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
XXX
XXX.
XXX
J1
J2
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
SCREWS (6X)
J1 (TO SaO2
MONITOR J1)
SV30028
J2 (FROM POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BLOCK TB14 AND TB21)
J2 (FROM SaO2
INTERFACE PANEL)
Figure 4-27: PULSE OXIMETER MODULE
4-98
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.28
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Power Controller Assembly
The Power Controller Assembly is located at the back of the machine within
the secondary power supply compartment. Access to the assembly requires
removal of the compartment cover. Figure 4-28 shows the mounting
arrangement and location of connections to the power controller assembly.
4.28.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.28.2
Disable the three circuit breakers located on the side of the primary
power supply assembly by pulling out each button with a knife or
sharp object.
4.28.3
Remove the eight screws holding the secondary power supply cover,
and remove the cover.
4.28.4
Disconnect the cables from J1, J7, J3, J4, J5, and J6 on the power
controller assembly.
4.28.5
Disconnect the ground wire.
4.28.6
Remove the four mounting screws and washers holding the power
controller assembly, and remove the assembly from the compartment.
4.28.7
Mount the replacement power controller assembly in the
compartment with the four screws and washers that were previously
removed.
4.28.8
Connect the ground wire to the assembly.
4.28.9
Connect the previously removed cables to the following points on the
power controller assembly:
J6 (to power distribution block in monitor housing)
J5 (to power distribution block in monitor housing)
J4 (from primary power supply P7)
J3 (from primary power supply P19)
J7 (to alarm channel connector J4)
J1 (from primary power supply P6)
4.28.10 Reinstall the secondary power supply compartment cover with its
eight retaining screws.
4.28.11 Reset the circuit breakers at the side of the primary power supply.
4.28.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-99
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 REAR VIEW
SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
COMPARTMENT COVER
J6
J5
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
TO POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BLOCK IN MONITOR
HOUSING
J4 (FROM PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY P7)
J3 (FROM PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY P19)
J7 (TO ALARM
CHANNEL J4)
GROUND WIRE
J1 (FROM PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY P6)
POWER
CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY
SV30029
Figure 4-28: POWER CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
4-100
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.29
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Multispec Power Supply
The Multispec Power Supply is located at the back of the machine within the
secondary power supply compartment. Access to the assembly requires removal
of the compartment cover. Figure 4-29 shows the mounting arrangement and
location of connections to the multispec power supply.
4.29.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.29.2
Disable the three circuit breakers located on the side of the primary
power supply assembly by pulling out each button with a knife or
sharp object.
4.29.3
Remove the eight screws holding the secondary power supply cover,
and remove the cover.
4.29.4
Remove the ground connection.
4.29.5
Remove the three mounting screws at the side of the secondary power
supply compartment, and pull the multispec power supply out far
enough to gain access to its connections.
4.29.6
Disconnect the cables from J2, J3, and J4 on the power supply.
4.29.7
Separate the in-line AC power connector and remove the power
supply.
4.29.8
Join the AC power cable to the in-line connector on the replacement
multispec power supply.
4.29.9
Connect the previously removed cables to the following points on the
replacement power supply:
J2 (to multispec analyzer PCB assembly J5 and J4)
J4 (to multispec analyzer PCB assembly J4)
J3 (to multispec analyzer PCB assembly J3)
4.29.10 Position the multispec power supply in the compartment and secure
it with the three mounting screws through the side wall of the
compartment.
4.29.11 Reinstall the secondary power supply compartment cover with its
eight retaining screws.
4.29.12 Reset the circuit breakers at the side of the primary power supply.
4.29.13 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-101
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 REAR VIEW
SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
COMPARTMENT COVER
J2 (TO MULTISPEC
ANALYZER PCB
ASSEMBLY J5 AND J4)
J4 (TO MULTISPEC
ANALYZER PCB
ASSEMBLY J4)
MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
GROUND
CONNECTION
AC POWER
CONNECTOR
(FROM PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY P20)
J3 (TO MULTISPEC
ANALYZER PCB
ASSEMBLY J3)
MULTISPEC
POWER SUPPLY
SV30057
Figure 4-29: MULTISPEC POWER SUPPLY
4-102
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.30
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Primary Power Supply
The Primary Power Supply is located in the housing on the machine frame
below the bottom drawer. It is accessible by removing the forward bottom
panel on the housing, which is also the power supply mounting bracket. Figure
4-30 shows the mounting arrangement and terminal block connections to the
primary power supply.
4.30.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.30.2
Disable the three circuit breakers located on the side of the primary
power supply assembly by pulling out each button with a knife or
sharp object.
4.30.3
Remove the four screws holding the forward bottom panel on the
primary power supply housing, and lower the primary power supply
to the floor.
4.30.4
Disconnect the control cable and terminal block wiring from the
primary power supply.
4.30.5
Remove the seven screws holding the primary power supply to its
mounting bracket, and remove the power supply.
4.30.6
Assemble the replacement power supply to the mounting bracket with
the seven screws that were previously removed.
4.30.7
Connect the terminal block wiring and control cable to the
replacement power supply.
4.30.8
Position the primary power supply in the housing and secure it with
the four mounting screws that were previously removed.
4.30.9
Reset the circuit breakers at the side of the primary power supply.
4.30.10 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-103
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
NARKOMED 3 REAR VIEW
CONTROL CABLE
(FROM P19)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PRIMARY POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
GRN/YEL
BLU
BRN
RED
+
BLK
-
YEL
+
BLK
-
8V
12V
BOTTOM VIEW OF
PRIMARY POWER
SUPPLY HOUSING
GND
NEUT
LINE
PRIMARY
POWER
SUPPLY
MOUNTING
BRACKET
SV30030
Figure 4-30: PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
4-104
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.31
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Battery Pack
The Battery Pack is located in the primary power supply housing on the
machine frame below the bottom drawer. It is accessible by removing the rear
bottom panel on the housing, which is also the bottom plate of the battery
pack. Figure 4-31 shows the battery pack mounting arrangement and
connection to the primary power supply.
4.31.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.31.2
Disable the three circuit breakers located on the side of the primary
power supply assembly by pulling out each button with a knife or
sharp object.
4.31.3
Remove the four screws holding the battery pack to the housing, and
lower the battery pack to the floor.
4.31.4
Disconnect primary power supply cable P3 from the battery pack, and
remove the battery pack.
4.31.5
Join the primary power supply cable to the connector on the
replacement battery pack.
4.31.6
Position the battery pack in the primary power supply housing and
secure it with the four screws that were previously removed.
4.31.7
Reset the circuit breakers at the side of the primary power supply.
4.31.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-105
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
PRIMARY POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
TO PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY
BATTERY
PACK
P3
BATTERY PACK
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
SV30031
Figure 4-31: BATTERY PACK
4-106
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
4.32
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Caster
Each caster is retained by a set screw in the side of the lower frame rail as
shown in Figure 4-32. Caster replacement requires that the machine be tilted
to provide enough clearance for the caster stem to be withdrawn from the
bottom of the frame rail.
NOTE: Early model NARKOMED 3 machines may have casters that are
threaded into the machine frame instead of having a set screw
retainer arrangement.
WARNING:
Do not tilt the machine more than 10 degrees or raise the
casters more than 3½ inches from the floor. Failure to observe
this precaution may result in a tip-over, causing personal injury.
Vaporizers containing anesthetic agent may also be damaged.
4.32.1
Obtain a brace capable of supporting one side of the machine with its
casters two to three inches from the floor.
4.32.2
Remove all unsecured equipment and accessories from the machine.
4.32.3
Lock the front casters.
4.32.4
Using at least two people, tilt the machine until the casters on one
side are raised two to three inches from the floor, and position the
support brace under the frame rail between the front and back
casters.
For early model machines with threaded casters, follow steps 4.32.4.1
thru 4.32.4.4.
4.32.4.1
Unscrew the caster from the frame and clean any debris
or loctite residue from the threads in the machine frame.
4.32.4.2
Thread the replacement caster into the machine frame,
tighten the caster, and measure the gap between the
caster and the machine frame with a 0.010" feeler gauge.
If the gap is zero or less than 0.010", remove the caster
and proceed to Step 4.32.4.3.
If the gap is greater than 0.010", remove the caster and
install a spacer on the caster.
4.32.4.3
Place a small amount of Loctite #222 (red) on the upper
threads of the caster stem, thread the caster into the
machine frame and tighten the caster.
4.32.4.4
Proceed to Step 4.32.9.
4-107
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
2 TO 3
INCHES
SETSCREW
PLASTIC
CAP
SV20334
Figure 4-32: CASTER REPLACEMENT
4-108
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.32.5
Remove the plastic cap in the side of the frame rail to provide access
to the caster stem set screw.
4.32.6
Loosen the set screw and remove the caster.
4.32.7
Insert the replacement caster into the frame and hold it in its seated
position.
4.32.8
Tighten the caster stem set screw and replace the plastic cap in the
frame rail.
4.32.9
Using at least two people, tilt the machine, remove the support brace
and carefully lower the machine to the floor.
4.32.10 Check for proper operation of the caster and ensure that the front
casters lock properly.
4.32.11 Replace any unsecured equipment and accessories that were
previously removed.
4.32.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6, including a vaporizer
calibration verification.
4-109
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.33
NM3
SPIROMED Respiratory Volume Sensor
The respiratory volume sensor is installed between the top of the absorber
assembly and the expiratory valve. Figure 4-33 shows the volume sensor
mounting arrangement, gaskets and connection to the sensor interface panel.
4.33.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.33.2
Disconnect the sensor plug from the volume sensor receptacle on the
interface panel.
4.33.3
Remove the expiratory valve by unscrewing the valve retaining nut.
4.33.4
Remove the volume sensor from the absorber assembly by unscrewing
its retaining nut.
CAUTION:
Do not twist the body of the sensor when loosening the retaining
nut. Hold the sensor while loosening the retaining nut to
prevent damage to the unit.
4.33.5
Install the replacement volume sensor on the absorber assembly.
Ensure that the gasket is seated properly and hand tighten the
retaining nut.
4.33.6
Install the expiratory valve on the sensor. Ensure that the gasket is
seated properly and hand tighten the valve retaining nut.
4.33.7
Connect the sensor plug to the volume sensor receptacle on the
interface panel.
4.33.8
Restore power to the machine and perform the respiratory flow
monitor calibration procedure given in Section 5.
4.33.9
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-110
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
VALVE
RETAINING NUT
RECEPTACLE
ON SENSOR
INTERFACE PANEL
GASKET
VOLUME
SENSOR
SPIROMED
SENSOR
SENSOR
RETAINING
NUT
SENSOR
PLUG
GASKET
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
MOUNT
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
SV40431
Figure 4-33: RESPIRATORY VOLUME SENSOR
4-111
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.34
NM3
Oxygen Sensor
The oxygen sensor is located on top of the inspiratory valve. Figure 4-34 shows
the arrangement of the sensor capsule and its housing, and also its connection
to the sensor interface panel.
4.34.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.34.2
Pull the oxygen sensor housing from the inspiratory valve dome. (It
is a press fit.)
4.34.3
Unscrew the cover from the sensor housing and remove the sensor
capsule.
4.34.4
Remove the replacement sensor capsule from its shipping container
and install it in the housing. Ensure that the copper rings on the
capsule mate with the electrical contacts in the sensor housing.
4.34.5
Wait 15 minutes to allow the sensor capsule to stabilize.
4.34.6
Restore power to the machine and perform the ambient air
calibration procedure for the oxygen monitor given in Section 5.
4.34.7
Press the sensor assembly into the inspiratory valve dome.
4.34.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-112
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SV20316
SENSOR HOUSING
RECEPTACLE
ON INTERFACE
PANEL
SENSOR CAPSULE
SENSOR HOUSING
COVER
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
PLUG
SENSOR
CORD
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-34: OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Rev. D
4-113
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.35
NM3
Manual Sphygmomanometer
The manual sphygmomanometer gauge is mounted on a threaded piece
attached to the underside of the boom arm mounting block. Figure 4-33 shows
the gauge mounting arrangement, and the gauge connection to the patient
interface panel.
4.35.1
Disconnect the gauge line from the BP GAUGE fitting on the patient
interface panel.
4.35.2
Remove the gauge by unscrewing its mounting ring from the fitting
on the boom arm mounting block.
4.35.3
Install the replacement gauge on the threaded fitting on the boom
arm mounting block, and hand tighten the gauge mounting ring.
4.35.4
Connect the gauge line to the BP GAUGE fitting on the patient
interface panel.
4.35.5
Ensure that the remaining connections are properly made:
Connect the hose on the blood pressure cuff to an extension hose, and
the other end of the extension hose to the BP CUFF fitting on the
patient interface panel.
Connect the inflation bulb hose to the BP BULB fitting on the front
of the machine.
4.35.6
Perform the following leak test on the manual sphygmomanometer:
4.35.6.1
Place the blood pressure cuff around a rigid cylindrical
object approximately the same diameter as a human arm.
4.35.6.2
Inflate the cuff to a pressure of 200 mm Hg, as indicated
on the gauge.
4.35.6.3
The pressure should not drop more than 10 mm Hg in 30
seconds.
4-114
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
INTERFACE PANEL
ON LEFT SIDE
OF MONITOR BOX
BP CUFF
BP GUAGE
GAUGE
MOUNT
THREADED
MOUNTING
RING
MANUAL
SPHYGMOMANOMETER
GAUGE
INTERNAL PIPING CONNECTS
BULB FITTING TO GAUGE
AND CUFF FITTINGS
FEMALE LUER FITTING
(SLIP FIT) FOR CUFF
INFLATION BULB
Figure 4-35: MANUAL SPHYGMOMANOMETER
4-115
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.36
NM3
Auxiliary Oxygen Flow Meter
Old and new style auxiliary oxygen flowmeters are attached to the side of the
machine’s flowmeter housing by two screws - accessible from inside the
housing. Later installations of the new style auxiliary oxygen flowmeter have
a stud and nut arrangement for mounting. A flexible O2 supply tube from the
flowmeter connects to a hose barb fitting at the system power switch. Figure
4-35 shows a typical mounting and tubing arrangement.
4.36.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.
4.36.2
Press the O2 Flush button to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.36.3
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.36.4
Remove the back cover from the flowmeter housing.
4.36.5
Cut the tie strap on the flexible tube at the system power switch, and
remove the tube.
4.36.6
Remove the screws (or nuts) securing the auxiliary O2 flowmeter, and
remove the flowmeter.
4.36.7
Position the replacement flowmeter at the side of the flowmeter
housing (feed the flex tubing through the clearance hole) and secure
the auxiliary O2 flowmeter with the two screws (or nuts) that were
previously removed.
4.36.8
Connect the flex tubing to the hose barb fitting behind the Clippard
valve, and secure it with a tie strap.
4.36.9
Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.
4.36.10 Connect the pipeline hoses and restore AC power to the machine.
4.36.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-116
Rev. T
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
MOUNTING SCREW (2X)
(USED WITH EARLIER
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT)
10
8
6
PRESS-ON
HOSE CLAMP
4
2
FLEX TUBING
AUXILIARY
OXYGEN
KEP HEX NUT
AUXILIARY O2
FLOWMETER
(NEW STYLE ILLUSTRATED)
TIE STRAP
HOSE BARB
FITTING
MACHINES WITH
LATER STYLE
CHANNEL
FLEX TUBING
TIE STRAP
SV50547
Figure 4-36: AUXILIARY O2 FLOWMETER
Rev. T
4-117
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.37
NM3
PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement
The PEEP valve magnet assembly removal and replacement is outlined in the
following procedure. Figure 4-33 shows the knob and magnet assembly details.
NOTE: Some older PEEP valve assemblies require the use of a tamper-proof
5/56 hex key (P/N S010056).
4.37.1
Loosen the two set screws on the block, at each side of the PEEP
knob using a 5/64 hex key. Back these screws out until they are flush
with the block to allow proper removal of the knob assembly.
4.37.2
Using a flat head screw driver, carefully pry the knob and magnet
assembly away from the block, and remove the assembly.
4.37.3
Remove the four or six screws securing the retaining ring on the knob
and magnet assembly, and remove the retaining ring.
4.37.4
Remove the magnet assembly from the knob and discard the magnet
in an appropriate manner.
4.37.5
Insert the new magnet assembly into the knob.
On new style knobs, make sure the magnet’s dowel pin engages the
slots in the knob. If the magnet is not oriented correctly there will be
freeplay in the knob before it turns the magnet.
4.37.6
Reinstall the retaining ring and secure it with the screws that were
previously removed.
4.37.7
Turn the set screws into the PEEP block until you can just see them
from the inside of the block.
4.37.8
Apply a thin coat of high vacuum grease to the O-rings on the magnet
assembly to aid in its installation.
4.37.9
Align the holes of the magnet assembly with the set screw holes, and
install the knob & magnet assembly into the PEEP block.
4.37.10 Slowly tighten the set screws. If the holes are lined up correctly. you
will be able to tighten the set screws several turns until they stop. If
you experience resistance, STOP tightening the set screw to prevent
damage to the magnet assembly. Re-align the magnet assembly and
tighten the set screw correctly.
4.37.11 Perform the PMS procedure given in Section 6.
4-118
Rev. T
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
M A G N E T A S S E M B L Y
O -R IN G
O -R IN G
R E T A IN IN G R IN G
S C R E W S
D O W E L P IN
R E T A IN IN G
R IN G
S L O T S
R E A R V IE W
O F K N O B
S E T S C R E W
(2 X )
Figure 4-37: PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement
Rev. T
4-119
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.0
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
Equipment Required:
Rev. G
--
Test Gauge for setting cylinder pressure regulators,
NAD Part No. S000063A
--
Oxygen Monitor for adjusting oxygen ratio controller
--
Calibration Gas Adapter, NAD Part No. 4110716
--
Calibration Gas Cylinder, NAD Part No. 4110599 or 41100599-001
--
Certified sample gas cylinder for Multispec accuracy check
--
Flowmeter Test Stand, NAD Part No. S000058
--
Test fixture with breathing pressure line connector, TEE connector,
digital pressure meter, and inflation device, for breathing pressure
monitor calibration.
--
For machines with a Capnomed monitor:
Calibration Gas Cylinder, NAD Part No. 4107979 or 4107979-001
Calibration Gas Adapter, NAD Part No. 4110216
5-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.1
NM3
Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment (except CO2)
5.1.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.1.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
5.1.3
Set the oxygen flow to 4 liters per min.
5.1.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
5.1.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve. Close all of the flow control valves and
press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.1.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.1.7
Remove the table top from the machine and remove the top cabinet
drawer. Pull the writing tray out out to its fully extended position.
NOTE: Minimum cylinder pressures for this adjustment shall be:
N2O & CO2: 600 psi; O2, Air, He, He/O2, N2: 1000 psi.
5.1.8
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter regulator output line,
and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
5.1.9
Connect a test gauge to the TEE fitting.
NOTE: For gases other than O2, the O2 cylinder valve must be open to allow
other gases to flow. For N2O regulator adjustment, open the N2O
flow control valve completely; then open the O2 flow control valve
until the N2O flow reaches 4 L/min.
5.1.10
Open the cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.1.11
Set the O2 flow to 4 L/min. (also set the N20 or other gas flow to 4
L/min. if these regulators are being adjusted).
5.1.12
Remove the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator to expose the
adjusting screw. For N2O, turn the screw until the test gauge
indicates 46 psi. (50 psi for CSA machines.) For O2 and other gases,
use the compensated regulator output setting based on the cylinder
pressure given in the following table.
5-2
Rev. R
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CAUTION: Based on information supplied by the cylinder regulator manufacturer,
when the regulator is used for gases other than N2O or CO2, its output pressure will
decrease 0.5 psi for every 100 psi increase in cylinder pressure above 1000 psi.
Currently, these regulators are calibrated at 47 psi with a cylinder supply of 1000 psi.
If a 2000 psi cylinder is then installed, the regulator output will be 42 psi. This
change in output must be compensated for to provide accurate performance
throughout the cylinder’s working range.
NOTE: Cylinder pressure compensation for the N2O regulator is not required.
Cylinder
Pressure (psi)
Compensated Regulator
Output Setting (psi)
Compensated Regulator
Output Tolerances (-4, +2)
2000
42 (*45)
38 - 44 (*41 - 47)
1800
43 (*46)
39 - 45 (*42 - 48)
1600
44 (*47)
40 - 46 (*43 - 49)
1400
45 (*48)
41 - 47 (*44 - 50)
1200
46 (*49)
42 - 48 (*45 - 51)
1000
47 (*50)
43 - 49 (*46 - 52)
* Canada Settings
NOTE:
If the O2 cylinder regulator is adjusted according to the chart,
perform the following test to verify that the Lo O2 supply alarm is
not activated during ventilation.
Open the O2 cylinder valve, install a breathing circuit with test lung to absorber, and
make the following settings:
MAN/AUTO selector to AUTO
Ventilator:
FREQUENCY: 10 BPM
I:E Ratio: 1:2
Tidal Volume: 1400 mL
PLC: MAX
INSP FLOW: HIGH
Set the Fresh Gas flow to 10 L/min.
Turn on the ventilator. While the ventilator is cycling, press the O2 flush button and
verify that the Lo O2 Supply alarm is not activated. If the alarm is activated, refer
to Section 5.2 for Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment.
Rev. R
5-2A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
5.1.13
Replace the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator.
5.1.14
Close the cylinder valve and allow pressure to drain from the system.
5.1.15
Close all of the flow control valves and set the System Power switch
to STANDBY.
5.1.16
Disconnect the test gauge from the TEE fitting and replace the plug
in the fitting.
5.1.17
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.1.18
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
5.1.19
Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.1.20
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-2B
Rev. R
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
TOP VIEW WITH
TABLE TOP REMOVED
O2 CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
N2O CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
SET
SCREWS
AIR OR OPTIONAL
3RD GAS CYLINDER
PRESSURE REGULATOR
TEST GAUGE
CONNECTION
(TYPICAL)
SIDE VIEW
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
SV20342
ACORN NUT
Figure 5-1: CYLINDER PRESSURE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT
5-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.1A
NM3
CO2 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment
5.1.1.A
Perform Steps 5.1.1 thru 5.1.7.
5.1.2.A
Open the CO2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.1.3.A
Fully open the CO2 flow control valve.
5.1.4.A
Remove the acorn nut on the bottom of the CO2 regulator to expose
the adjusting screw. Turn the screw until the CO2 flowmeter indicates
550 ml/min.
5.1.5.A
Replace the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator.
5.1.6.A
Close the cylinder valve and allow pressure to drain from the system.
5.1.7.A
Close the flow control valve and set the System Power switch to
STANDBY.
5.1.8.A
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.1.9.A
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
5.1.10.A Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.1.11.A Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-4
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.2
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment
5.2.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.2.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
5.2.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.2.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
5.2.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.2.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.2.7
Remove the rear cover from the machine. Remove the table top and
remove the top cabinet drawer. Refer to replacement procedure 4.8.
5.2.8
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter regulator output line,
and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
5.2.9
Connect a test gauge to the TEE fitting.
5.2.10
Open the O2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.2.11
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.2.12
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
5.2.12
As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
5.2.13
If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel counter-clockwise, repeat the test and adjust as
necessary to bring the set point into the correct range.
If the alarm activates when the pressure is above 40 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel clockwise,repeat the test and adjust as necessary
to bring the set point into the correct range.
5-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
REAR VIEW, FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
SV40608
O2 LINES
ALARM
WIRES
INCREASE
SETPOINT
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
Figure 5-2: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
5-6
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.2.14
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.2.15
Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator line
TEE fitting.
5.2.16
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.2.17
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
5.2.18
Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.2.19
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.3
NM3
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller Adjustment
5.3.1
Remove the rear cover of the vapor box. Refer to replacement
procedure 4.10.
5.3.2
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the Freshgas Outlet.
5.3.3
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.3.4
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
5.3.5
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.3.6
Close the O2 flow control valve.
5.3.7
Open the N2O flow control valve to its counter-clockwise stop.
5.3.8
If there is no nitrous oxide flow, proceed to Step 5.3.10.
5.3.9
If there is nitrous oxide flow, loosen setscrew E and move the cam
mounting bracket to the right until the nitrous oxide flow stops.
Tighten setscrew E.
5.3.10
Slowly open the O2 flow control valve.
5.3.11
If the nitrous oxide starts to flow when the oxygen flow is between
200 and 300 ml per minute, proceed to Step 5.3.14.
5.3.12
If the nitrous oxide does not start to flow when the oxygen flow is
between 200 and 300 ml per minute, loosen setscrew E and move the
cam mounting bracket to the left until nitrous oxide flow starts.
Tighten setscrew E.
5.3.13
Repeat steps 5.3.6 thru 5.3.12 until no further adjustment of the cam
mounting bracket is needed.
5.3.14
Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide flowmeter
indicates 10 liters per minute.
NOTE: Steps marked with an asterisk (*) do not apply to later model
machines that do not have the O2/N2O ratio lamp on the alarm
channel.
5-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NARKOMED 3
REAR VIEW
N2O TUBING
O2 TUBING
N20
MPL SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO DECREASE
SETPOINT)
N20
A
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR/CONTROLLER
CAM
MOUNTING
BRACKET
E
SWITCH MOUNT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CAM
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO CLOSE CONTACTS)
H
SV30311
Figure 5-3: OXYGEN RATIO MONITOR/CONTROLLER ADJUSTMENTS
5-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
5.3.15
The oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
*
5.3.16
If the yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel is lighted,
proceed to step 5.3.20.
*
5.3.17
If the yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel is not
lighted, loosen setscrew H and turn the switch adjustment cam until
it is pointing downward.
*
5.3.18
Loosen setscrew A and move the switch mount until it is nearly
touching the switch adjustment cam. Tighten setscrew A.
*
5.3.19
Turn the switch adjustment cam clockwise until the contacts close
and the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp is lighted. Tighten setscrew H.
*
5.3.20
Close the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.3.21
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute.
*
5.3.22
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.3.23
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
*
5.3.24
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 liters per minute.
*
5.3.25
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.3.26
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
5.3.27
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 liters per minute.
5.3.28
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
5.3.29
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
5.3.30
Close the oxygen flow control valve. The nitrous oxide flow should
decrease proportionally, and the oxygen concentration should remain
between 21% and 29% oxygen.
*
5-10
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.3.31
The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of oxygen is
between 200 and 300 ml per minute.
*
5.3.32
If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp turns off when the nitrous oxide
flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml per minute, proceed to Step
5.3.34.
*
5.3.33
If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp does not turn off when the nitrous
oxide flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml per minute, adjust the
MPL switch until the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp turns off.
5.3.34
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.3.35
Close the N2O flow control valve.
5.3.36
Reconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.3.37
Replace the rear cover of the vapor box.
5.3.38
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.4
NM3
Oxygen Monitor Calibration
5.4.1
Offset Adjustment
5.4.1.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.4.1.2
Press and hold the
and
keys on the oxygen
monitor panel, and turn the System Power switch to ON.
The display window should indicate 100 .
5.4.1.3
If the display indicates 100 , then no adjustment is
required.
If the display does not indicate 100 , continue with the
adjustment procedure.
5.4.1.4
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.4.1.5
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the
back of the monitor housing.
5.4.1.6
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer
screws, and swing open the back cover.
5.4.1.7
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and
disconnect its ground wire.
5.4.1.8
Repeat Step 5.4.1.2.
5.4.1.9
Adjust R17 on the top of the monitor (see Figure 5-4) to
bring the reading to 100 .
5.4.1.10
Place a small drop of red Glyptal insulating varnish on
the adjustment screw to lock it in place.
5.4.1.11
Turn the System Power Switch to STANDBY and remove
AC power from the machine.
5.4.1.12
Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and reconnect its ground wire.
5.4.1.13
Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the
retaining screws. Re-connect any external cables that
were previously removed from the serial ports.
5-12
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
R17 OFFSET
ADJUSTMENT
DISPLAY
WINDOW
O 2CAL KEY
LED INDICATOR
OXYGEN
O2CAL
VOL %
OXYGEN ALARMS
OXYGEN HI
OXYGEN LO
O2 SENSOR
HI
LO
SV30058
Figure 5-4: O2MED MONITOR PANEL AND OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
5-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.4.2
NM3
Ambient Air Calibration
5.4.2.1
Remove the oxygen sensor assembly from the inspiratory
valve dome and close off the dome with the inspiratory
valve dome plug.
5.4.2.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.4.2.3
Hold the sensor assembly away from any gas fittings to
ensure that it is exposed only to ambient air, and allow
it to stabilize for several minutes.
5.4.2.4
Press the O2 CAL key. The yellow LED indicator in the
upper right corner of the key will then illuminate to
indicate that calibration has begun. The display window
will show three dashes during calibration, and the
messages O2 NOT CAL and O2 ALRM OFF will appear
on the alarm CRT.
The length of time that the sensor takes to calibrate
depends on the gas mixture to which the sensor had been
exposed prior to calibration. If the sensor had been
exposed to 21% oxygen for greater than one minute,
calibration can take as little as 10 seconds. If the sensor
had been exposed to higher concentrations of oxygen,
calibration may last up to 50 seconds. Typically,
calibration will last less than 30 seconds.
5.4.2.5
When calibration is completed, the LED indicator on the
O2 CAL key will extinguish, and the three dashes in the
display window will be replaced by the currently sensed
oxygen concentration.
5.4.2.6
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5-14
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.5
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
BAROMED Monitor Calibration
5.5.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.5.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
5.5.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
5.5.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
5.5.5
Disconnect the breathing pressure line from the absorber and connect
it to a test fixture having TEE connector, digital pressure meter, and
an inflation device (see Figure 5-5).
5.5.6
Press and hold the
and
keys on the Baromed monitor panel,
and turn the System Power switch to ON.
5.5.7
With the digital pressure meter reading zero, adjust R13 on the
monitor until the monitor display window reads 00.0 ± 0.5 cm H2O.
5.5.8
Increase the pressure until the digital meter reads 60.0 cm H2O.
5.5.9
Adjust R4 on the monitor until the monitor display window reads
60.0 ± 2.0 cm H2O.
NOTE: Because the zero and span adjustments interact, it is necessary to
repeat Steps 5.5.7 thru 5.5.9 until a valid calibration is obtained.
5.5.10
Place a small drop of red Glyptal insulating varnish on the R4 and
R13 adjustment screws to lock them in place.
5.5.11
Turn the System Power Switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
5.5.12
Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
5.5.13
Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
5.5.14
Connect the breathing pressure line from the sensor interface panel
to the absorber.
5-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR
R4 60CM H2O
SPAN ADJ.
R13
ZERO ADJ.
MEAN
PEAK
APNEA
ALARMS
DISABLE
cm H2O PEEP
BAROMED
SENSOR INTERFACE
PANEL
BREATHING PRESSURE ALARMS
APNEA
PRES H I
SUB ATM
CTNG PRES
HI
BREATHING
PRESSURE
DIGITAL PRESSURE
METER
TEST FIXTURE
SV30059
Figure 5-5: BAROMED MONITOR ADJUSTMENTS AND TEST SETUP
5-16
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6
Multispec Analyzer Calibration and Flowrate Adjustment
NOTE:
Perform the flow rate adjustment and the oxygen sensor ambient air
calibration before proceeding with the multispec span calibration.
NOTE:
Before attempting the multispec flowrate adjustment, first perform
the flowrate test to determine whether adjustment is necessary.
5.6.1
Multispec Flowrate Test
5.6.1.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.6.1.2
Connect a test flowmeter to the exhaust port on the
sensor interface panel.
5.6.1.3
Press and hold the
and
keys on the multispec
monitor panel, and turn the System Power switch to ON.
The display window should indicate 02 . Over a period
of time the display will change to 05 , and then to 30 .
5.6.1.4
Wait 15 seconds, then press the HI key. The test
flowmeter should indicate 200 ±25 ml/min.
5.6.1.5
Press the LO key. The test flowmeter should indicate 100
±25 ml/min.
If both flowrates are within the allowable tolerance, an
adjustment is not needed.
If either flowrate is not within specification, proceed to
Step 5.6.2.
DISPLAY KEY
DISPLAY
WINDOW
%
mmHg
ET CO2
ET AGENT
INSP AGENT
APNEA
ET CO2 HI
ET CO2 LO
AGENT HI
AGENT
SELECT
CAL
CO2/AGT
ALARMS
DISABLE
ALARMS
HI
LO
SV30002
Figure 5-6: MULTISPEC MONITOR PANEL
5-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6.2
5.6.3
NM3
Multispec Flowrate Adjustment
5.6.2.1
Press the HI key on the multispec monitor panel. The
display window will show 200 .
5.6.2.2
Press the
or
key on the multispec monitor panel
until the test flowmeter reads 200 ml/min; then press the
DISPLAY key to store the calibration value. The display
window will show 02 , 05 , or 30 .
5.6.2.3
Press the LO key on the multispec monitor panel. The
display window will show 100 .
5.6.2.4
Press the
or
key on the multispec monitor panel
until the test flowmeter reads 100 ml/min; then press the
DISPLAY key to store the calibration value.
5.6.2.5
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return
it to the ON position.
5.6.2.6
Press the HI key and observe the test flowmeter, then
press the LO key. Verify that both flow rates are within
specification.
5.6.2.7
Disconnect the test flowmeter from the exhaust port on
the sensor interface panel.
Oxygen Sensor Ambient Air Calibration
5.6.3.1
Remove the oxygen sensor assembly from the inspiratory
valve dome and close off the dome with the inspiratory
valve dome plug.
5.6.3.2
Hold the sensor assembly away from any gas fittings to
ensure that it is exposed only to ambient air, and allow
it to stabilize for several minutes.
5.6.3.3
Press the O2 CAL key. The yellow LED indicator in the
upper right corner of the key will then illuminate to
indicate that calibration has begun. The display window
will show three dashes during calibration, and the
messages O2 NOT CAL and O2 ALRM OFF will appear
on the alarm CRT.
5-18
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
The length of time that the sensor takes to calibrate
depends on the gas mixture to which the sensor had been
exposed prior to calibration. If the sensor had been
exposed to 21% oxygen for greater than one minute,
calibration can take as little as 10 seconds. If the sensor
had been exposed to higher concentrations of oxygen,
calibration may last up to 50 seconds. Typically,
calibration will last less than 30 seconds.
5.6.3.4
When calibration is completed, the LED indicator on the
O2 CAL key will extinguish, and the three dashes in the
display window will be replaced by the currently sensed
oxygen concentration.
NOTE: Before attempting a span calibration, perform the following accuracy
test to determine whether calibration is necessary.
5.6.4
Rev. G
Multispec Accuracy Test:
5.6.4.1
Mount the calibration gas adapter on a gas cylinder
containing a certified sample of known accuracy.
NOTE:
Do not use the calibration gas cylinder, NAD Part No.
4110599 or 4110599-001, to perform the accuracy test.
5.6.4.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.6.4.3
Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve to
expose the sensor capsule to ambient air.
5.6.4.4
Allow the multispec analyzer to warm up to its full
accuracy mode (the AGT WARMUP message will no
longer appear on the alarm CRT).
5.6.4.5
Connect the output of the calibration gas adapter to the
sample line at the patient interface panel as shown in
Figure 5-7. Make sure that the Luer-lock connections are
tight.
5.6.4.6
Set the calibration gas flow to 250 ml/min.
5-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
MULTISPEC
FRONT
PANEL
SV3003
CAL
LUER-LOCK
CONNECTION
(LOCATED ON BACK
OF CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER)
O2
INTERFACE
PANEL
WATER
TRAP
CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER
SEMI-PERMEABLE
TUBE
CALIBRATION GAS
ADAPTER VALVE
FLOWMETER
CONTROL
KNOB
CALIBRATION
GAS CYLINDER
Figure 5-7: MULTISPEC SPAN CALIBRATION SETUP
5-20
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6.4.7
Observe the current values of CO2, N2O, and Agent
shown in the display window.
When checking the multispec accuracy against a known
standard, the maximum possible error range must be
considered. To calculate this range, use the summation of
the multispec accuracy and noise specifications for a
specific gas reading, along with the error range, along
with the error percentage of the known standard.
For example, if a calibration gas that contains 2%
Enflurane has a stated maximum error percentage of
±2%, one must first calculate the error percentage of
Enflurane in the calibration gas, which is ±2% of 2%, or
0.04% absolute. Adding this figure to those obtained from
Table 5-1, the maximum possible error range would be
(±0.2) + (±0.1) + (±0.04), or ±0.34 vol %. Since the known
standard contains 2% Enflurane, a multispec reading for
Enflurane that is between 1.66% and 2.34% is within
specifications.
Table 5-1:
5-1 MULTISPEC ACCURACY AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS
Gas Measurement
Accuracy (full accuracy mode)
Noise
Carbon Dioxide
±2.0 mm Hg (0 to 40 mm Hg)
±2.5 mm Hg (41 to 60 mm Hg)
±4.0 mm Hg (61 to 80 mm Hg)
0.5 mm Hg
2.0 mm Hg
3.0 mm Hg
Nitrous Oxide
±7.5 vol % N2O
3 vol % N2O
Halothane
±0.2 vol % Hal, or 10% of reading*
0.2 vol % Hal
Enflurane
±0.2 vol % Enf, or 10% of reading*
0.1 vol % Enf
Isoflurane
±0.2 vol % Iso, or 10% of reading*
0.1 vol % Iso
* Whichever is greater
5-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
5.6.4.8
Turn off the gas flow at the calibration gas adapter.
5.6.4.9
If the accuracy test produces readings that have greater
than the maximum permissible error range, proceed to
Step 5.6.5.4 and perform a span calibration.
5.6.4.10
If the readings are within specifications, a span
calibration is not necessary. Disconnect the sample line
from the calibration gas adapter and remove the adapter
from the calibration gas cylinder.
5-22
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6.5
Span calibration procedure:
5.6.5.1
Mount the calibration gas adapter on the calibration gas
cylinder, (NAD Part No. 4110599 or 4110599-001).
5.6.5.2
Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve to
expose the sensor capsule to ambient air.
5.6.5.3
Connect the output of the calibration gas adapter to the
sample line at the patient interface panel as shown in
Figure 5-7. Make sure that the Luer-lock connections are
tight.
5.6.5.4
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.6.5.5
Press and hold the
and
keys on the multispec
monitor panel, and turn the System Power switch to ON.
The display window should indicate 02 . Over a period
of time the display will change to 05 , and then to 30 .
Rev. G
5.6.5.6
Press the CAL key on the multispec monitor panel. A one
second beep will occur, and a 30 second countdown will
be displayed.
5.6.5.7
When the beep occurs, set the calibration gas flow to 250
ml/min.
5.6.5.8
When the span calibration is completed, three dashes
--- will appear in the display window.
NOTE:
EEE in the display window indicates a calibration
failure. If this occurs, repeat steps 5.6.5.6 and 5.6.5.7. If
the multispec fails to calibrate again, contact the NAD
Service Department.
5.6.5.9
Turn off the calibration gas flow. Disconnect the sample
line from the calibration gas adapter and remove the
adapter from the calibration gas cylinder.
5.6.5.10
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6 including
a vapor concentration verification.
5-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6A
NM3
Multispec 4610 Analyzer Calibration and Flowrate Adjustment
NOTE:
Perform the flow rate adjustment and the oxygen sensor ambient air
calibration before proceeding with the multispec span calibration.
Flowrate Adjustment:
5.6.1.A
Connect a test flowmeter to the exhaust port on the sensor interface
panel of the Narkomed 3.
5.6.2.A
Verify that a water trap and sample line are connected at the patient
interface panel.
5.6.3.A
Turn the System Power switch to ON while simultaneously pressing
the
and
keys on the multispec monitor. The multispec
display window will show 02 .
NOTE: From a cold start (AC first applied) it may require a two minute wait
until the pump turns on.
During the first two minutes of operation the AGENT SELECT key
will be disabled, and there will be no line block detection.
During the first eight minutes of operation the ALARMS DISABLE
and CAL keys will be disabled. The fan and the Andros continue
running when the machine is in standby and AC is applied.
The fan and Andros will continue running when the machine is in
STANDBY, and AC is applied.
DISPLAY KEY
DISPLAY
WINDOW
%
mmHg
ET CO2
ET AGENT
INSP AGENT
APNEA
ET CO2 HI
ET CO2 LO
AGENT HI
AGENT
SELECT
CAL
CO2/AGT
ALARMS
DISABLE
ALARMS
HI
LO
SP12112
Figure 5-6A: MULTISPEC MONITOR PANEL
5-23A
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6.4.A
Adjust the variable restrictor on the analyzer and pump assembly
until the test flowmeter indicates 200 ml/min.
5.6.5.A
Enter the line block calibration mode by pressing the HI key. The
multispec monitor display window shall indicate 200 .
5.6.6.A
Occlude the sample line for at least 6 seconds, then press the
DISPLAY key to calibrate line block. The flow at the exhaust should
drop to "0".
5.6.7.A
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then back to ON and
wait two minutes, or until there is flow at the exhaust.
5.6.8.A
Verify the line block calibration by occluding the sample line. Within
10 to 15 seconds, LLL shall appear on the monitor display window.
CO2 LINE BLK will be displayed in the Advisory column on the data
CRT if display space is available. If display space is not available,
clear the other advisories and verify that the CO2 LINE BLOCK
message is displayed.
Span Calibration:
5.6.9.A
Mount the calibration gas adapter (P/N 4110716) on the calibration
gas cylinder (P/N 4110599).
5.6.10.A Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve to expose the
sensor capsule to ambient air.
5.6.11.A Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.6.12.A Turn the System Power switch to ON while simultaneously pressing
the
and
keys on the multispec monitor.
The multispec monitor display window will show
From a cold start, in approximately 2 minutes the
to 05 . In approximately another 28 minutes the
to 30 .
02 .
02 will change
05 will change
NOTE: From a cold start the gas analyzer requires approximately 30 minutes
to reach full accuracy mode.
Approximately 22 minutes are needed if the machine has been
plugged into a live AC outlet (warm start). The machine will go from
the 02 mode, perform an auto Zero calibration, skip the 05 mode
and go directly to the 30 mode.
Rev. B
5-23B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
When the 30 appears, the analyzer is in full accuracy mode and
you may proceed with the Span calibration.
5.6.13.A Connect the output of the calibration gas adapter to the sample line
as shown. Make sure that the Luer-lock connections are tight.
5.6.14.A Press the CAL key on the multispec monitor to initiate an automatic
Zero calibration.
5.6.15.A Following the Zero cal, a one second beep will occur. Turn on the
calibration gas flow to 200 ml/min. as soon as you hear the beep.
A 30 second countdown will be displayed.
5.6.16.A When the span calibration is completed, three dashes
appear in the display window.
NOTE:
---
will
EEE in the display window indicates a calibration failure. If this
occurs, repeat the Span calibration. If the multispec fails to calibrate
again, contact the NAD Service Department.
5.6.17.A Turn off the calibration gas flow and turn the System Power switch
to STANDBY.
NOTE: Upon AC power fail/interrupt, the monitor will display E07 and then
will clear, and again display E07 for a few minutes until the Andros
recovers. When the E07 disappears, the analyzer will proceed as from
a cold start and will go through the warm-up sequence.
5-23C
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
PATIENT INTERFACE PANEL
(WITH DUAL PORTS)
SEMI-PERMEABLE
TUBE
DISPOSABLE RESERVOIR
SAMPLE-LINE
CONNECTION
RETAINING
SLOT
FILTER
LUER-LOCK CONNECTION
(LOCATED ON BACK OF
CALIBRATION GAS ADAPTER)
CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER
CALIBRATION GAS
ADAPTER VALVE
CALIBRATION
GAS CYLINDER
FLOWMETER
CONTROL KNOB
SV71101
Figure 5-7A: MULTISPEC SPAN CALIBRATION SETUP
Rev. F
5-23D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.7
NM3
CRT Alignment
Refer to Figures 5-8 and 5-9 for locations of the CRT adjustments on the lower
circuit board of the CRT assembly.
5.7.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.7.2
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
5.7.3
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
5.7.4
Remove the top shelf from the monitor housing and disconnect its
ground wire.
WARNING:
When making adjustments to the CRT assembly, use only nonmetallic alignment tools and be careful not to touch any of the
high voltage leads or CRT circuitry.
5.7.5
Turn the System Power Switch to ON, and select a display that
occupies the full screen area.
5.7.6
Turn the contrast control fully clockwise.
5.7.7
Turn the master brightness control fully clockwise, then turn the
master brightness control counter-clockwise to a point where the
raster lines just disappear.
5.7.8
Set the contrast control for optimum screen appearance.
5.7.9
Adjust the vertical linearity control to minimize vertical distortion.
(Character height should be nearly the same at top and bottom of
screen.)
5.7.10
Set the vertical height control for a picture height of 3.75 inches.
5.7.11
Set the horizontal width control for a picture width of 5 inches.
5.7.12
Adjust the horizontal centering control to center the picture on the
screen.
5.7.13
Adjust the focus control for the sharpest possible picture.
5-24
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
HORIZ. CENT.
R 34
HEIGHT CONT.
R 10
MASTER BRIGHT CONT.
R1
L2
VERTICAL LINE CONT.
R 12
R 79
WIDTH
CONTRAST
CONT.
FOCUS CONT.
FLYBACK
TRANSFORMER
R 48
Figure 5-8: WELLS GARDNER CRT ADJUSTMENTS
BRIGHT
VERTICAL
LINE
R 163
R 110
J 103
R 123
CONTRAST
WIDTH
L 104
R 160
FOCUS
HEIGHT
R 108
HORIZONTAL CENT.
R 138
FLYBACK
TRANSFORMER
Figure 5-9: BALL CRT ADJUSTMENTS
5-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
5.7.14
Turn the System Power Switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
5.7.15
Reinstall the top shelf on the monitor housing and re-connect its
ground wire.
5.7.16
Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
5.7.17
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-26
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.8
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizer Interlock Adjustment
5.8.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.8.2
Turn the center vaporizer handwheel ON. The left and the right
vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their Zero position. If the
left or right vaporizer does not lock, tighten the corresponding center
set screw until the handwheel locks properly. See Figure 5-10.
5.8.3
Turn the center vaporizer OFF and turn the left vaporizer ON. The
center and the right vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their
Zero position. If the right vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking
nut on the right set screw and adjust the set screw until the
handwheel locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while holding the
set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE:
5.8.4
Do not over-tighten the set screws. Each vaporizer
handwheel must turn easily while the other vaporizers
are locked .
Turn the left vaporizer OFF and turn the right vaporizer ON. The
center and the left vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their
Zero position. If the left vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking
nut on the left set screw and adjust the set screw until the handwheel
locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while holding the set screw to
maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE: When the interlock adjustment procedure is completed, ensure that
all vaporizer handwheels are set to their zero or OFF position.
5.8.5
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
VAPORIZER INTERLOCK MECHANISM REAR VIEW
NM3
SV40660
LEFT
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING SCREW
LOCATIONS (2 EA)
RIGHT
SETSCREW
Figure 5-10: VAPORIZER INTERLOCK ADJUSTMENT
5-28
CENTER
SETSCREWS
(RECESSED)
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.9
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizer Select Switch Adjustment
5.9.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.9.2
Remove the four screws holding the rear panel of the vapor box, and
remove the panel.
5.9.3
Remove the two screws holding the oxygen ratio monitor/controller to
the bottom panel of the vapor box. Remove the four screws holding
the bottom panel of the vapor box, and remove the panel.
5.9.4
Remove the four screws holding the front cover. Carefully lower the
cover so that it is supported by the wire harnesses joined to its circuit
board.
5.9.5
At the circuit board, disconnect the wire harness for the switch that
is being adjusted, and connect an ohmmeter to the wire harness.
5.9.6
With the corresponding vaporizer handwheel at zero, the switch
should be open. When the vaporizer is turned on, the switch contacts
should close.
Loosen the adjusting screw locknut and turn the adjusting screw to
raise or lower the switch bracket until the correct action is achieved.
Tighten the locknut when the adjustment is completed. Refer to
Figure 5-11.
NOTE: When the switch adjustment procedure is completed, ensure that the
vaporizer handwheel is returned to its zero or OFF position.
5.9.7
Disconnect the ohmmeter and connect the wiring harness to the
circuit board.
5.9.8
Replace the front cover, carefully guiding the gas selector switch cam
into its spring, and secure the cover with its four mounting screws.
5.9.9
Replace the bottom panel of the vapor box and secure it with the four
screws. Replace the two screws that hold the oxygen ratio
monitor/controller to the bottom panel.
5.9.10
Replace the rear panel of the vapor box and secure it with the four
screws.
5.9.11
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
SWITCH
BRACKET
VAPORIZER
SELECT SWITCH
NM3
ADJUSTING
SCREW
LOCK NUT
SWITCH BRACKET
MOUNTING SCREW
WIRING
HARNESS
ADJUSTING
SCREW
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR / CONTROLLER
FRONT
COVER
REAR PANEL
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
VAPOR BOX
REAR PANEL
FRONT COVER
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
VAPOR BOX
BOTTOM PANEL
CIRCUIT
BOARD
ORMC MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
BOTTOM PANEL
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
SV30060
RIGHT SIDE VIEW CUT-AWAY
SHOWING TYPICAL VAPORIZER SELECT
SWITCH MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
Figure 5-11: VAPORIZER SELECT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
5-30
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
5.10
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CAPNOMED (B) Barometric Pressure Adjustment for High Altitudes
(Applies only to machines with a Capnomed monitor)
NOTE: The Capnomed monitor has the capability to compensate for the
nominal atmospheric barometric pressure for a given altitude. Since
the monitor does not have a pressure sensor to monitor the current
atmospheric pressure (as do the NM3, VA3000 and NM4 Multispec
monitors), the nominal or average pressure must be programmed into
the Capnomed monitor by the following off-line calibration procedure.
5.10.1
Disconnect any external serial interface cables from the back of the
monitor housing.
5.10.2
Remove the two monitor housing back cover retainer screws, and
swing open the back cover.
5.10.3
Determine the firmware version in your Capnomed monitor. This
procedure requires firmware version 2.01 or later, with version 2.03
(P/N 4109008) recommended.
5.10.4
Determine the average barometric pressure by calling a local weather
service.
Multiply the data obtained in In.Hg by 25.4 to obtain the barometric
pressure in mm Hg (needed for calibration of the Capnomed monitor).
Data can also be obtained from the chart shown on the next page. For
example: At an elevation of 5209 ft., the pressure-altitude equivalent
is 24.7 In.Hg.
Thus, 24.7 x 25.4 = 627 mm Hg.
Rev. B
5-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM3
ELEVATION ABOVE SL (SEA LEVEL)
(Source: 1971 Almanac, Simon & Schuster)
PRESSURE-ALTITUDE EQUIVALENTS
(Source: NACA Report No. 538)
CITY
IN.HG
ALT.
IN.HG
ALT.
24.0
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.7
24.8
24.9
5974
5863
5753
5644
5534
5425
5317
5209
5101
4994
28.0
28.1
28.2
28.3
28.4
28.5
28.6
28.7
28.8
28.9
1824
1727
1630
1533
1436
1340
1244
1148
1053
957
25.0
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
25.8
25.9
4886
4780
4673
4567
4462
4356
4251
4146
4042
3938
29.0
29.1
29.2
29.3
29.4
29.5
29.6
29.7
29.8
29.9
863
768
673
579
485
392
298
205
112
-20
26.0
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
26.7
26.8
26.9
3824
3731
3628
3525
3422
3320
3218
3117
3016
2915
30.0
30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4
30.5
30.6
30.7
30.8
30.9
-73
-165
-257
-348
-440
-531
-622
-712
-803
-893
27.0
27.1
27.2
27.3
27.4
27.5
27.6
27.7
27.8
27.9
2814
2714
2614
2514
2415
2315
2217
2118
2020
1922
ALTITUDE, FT.
HIGH
LOW
Akron
Atlanta
Baltimore
Birmingham
Boston
1081
1050
490
1260
330
940
SL
580
SL
Buffalo
Chicago
Cincinnati
Cleveland
Columbus
698
672
960
865
902
571
581
441
573
702
Dallas
Dayton
Denver
Detroit
El Paso
685
981
5470
865
4000
375
727
5130
574
Fort Worth
Honolulu
Houston
Indianapolis
Kansas City
780
4025
54
840
1014
520
SL
SL
700
722
Los Angeles
Louisville
Memphis
Miami
Milwaukee
5081
761
331
Average 12 ft.
580
SL
382
Minneapolis
New Orleans
New York
Newark
Oakland
945
15
410
273
1700
695
(-)4
SL
SL
SL
Oklahoma City
Omaha
Philadelphia
Phoenix
Pittsburgh
1276
1270
440
2470
1240
1070
Portland
Rochester
St. Louis
San Antonio
San Diego
1073
655
605
717
1586
SL
246
410
San Francisco
Seattle
Tampa
Toledo
Tulsa
900
540
84
630
674
SL
SL
SL
SL
1017
715
SL
5-32
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.10.5
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.10.6
Turn the System Power switch to ON while simultaneously pressing
the
and
keys on the Capnomed (B) monitor.
5.10.7
After approximately ten seconds, a "10" will appear in the monitor
display window.
5.10.8
Press the "blank" key to the right of the DISPLAY key (see Figure 512).
5.10.9
A number between 600 and 800 should appear on the monitor
display. Using the
and
keys, adjust the display to show the
nominal barometric pressure reading obtained in Step 5.10.4
NOTE: The adjustment range is 600 to 800 mm Hg.
5.10.10 Press the DISPLAY key to enter the value into non-volatile memory.
5.10.11 Cycle the System Power switch to STANDBY and back to ON.
5.10.12 Verify the Capnomed Analyzer voltages: Refer to Field Service
Procedure SP00051, NM3 Capnomed Analyzer Voltage Adjustment.
5.10.13 Verify the Capnomed Analyzer flow rate: Refer to Field Service
Procedure SP00052, NM3 Capnomed Analyzer Flow Adjustment.
5.10.14 Close the monitor housing back cover and replace the retaining
screws. Re-connect any external cables that were previously removed
from the serial ports.
5.10.15 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
'BLANK' KEY
ET CO2
INSP CO2
DISPLAY
APNEA
CO2 HI
CO2 LO
LINE BLOCK
END TIDAL CO 2 ALARMS
HI
Figure 5-12: CAPNOMED MONITOR
Rev. B
CO2 CAL
5-33
LO
CO2
ALARMS
DISABLE
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.11
NM3
CAPNOMED Span Calibration
NOTE: The Narkomed 3 must be plugged into an AC outlet for at least an
hour prior to performing a span calibration in order to obtain full
accuracy.
5.11.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.11.2
Turn the System Power switch to ON while simultaneously pressing
the
and
keys on the Capnomed monitor. This initiates a ten
minute count down period to allow the Capnomed analyzer to
stabilize, after which three dashes appear in the monitor display
window to indicate that the analyzer is ready for calibration.
5.11.3
Press the CO2 CAL key on the monitor. After several seconds the
display window should show 00.
5.11.4
Connect the CO2 calibration gas cylinder (P/N 4107979 or 4107979001), calibration gas adapter (P/N 4110216), and sample line to the
patient interface panel as shown in Figure 5-12.
5.11.5
Turn the knob on the calibration gas adapter counter-clockwise until
the flow of gas can be heard.
5.11.6
Press the DISPLAY key on the monitor. A flashing 38 should replace
the 00 in the display window.
5.11.7
After 30 seconds, the CO2 CAL lamp should be lighted. Press the CO2
CAL key. The 38 should stop flashing and remain lighted.
NOTE: If the display window does not stop flashing after pressing the CO2
CAL key, notify the North American Dräger Technical Service
Department.
5.11.8
Close the valve on the calibration gas adapter.
5.11.9
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return the switch
to the ON position. Wait 10 minutes.
5.11.10 Turn on the CO2 flow at the calibration gas adapter. Wait 15 seconds.
5.11.11 Disconnect the sample line from the calibration gas adapter. The End
Tidal reading in the display window should be 38 ±2.
5.11.12 Close the valve on the calibration gas adapter, and turn the System
Power switch to STANDBY.
5-34
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CAPNOMED
FRONT PANEL
ET CO2
INSP CO2
CO2 CAL
mmHg
APNEA
CO2 HI
CO2 LO
LINE BLOCK
CO2
ALARMS
DISABLE
END-TIDAL CO2 ALARMS
HI
LO
SAMPLE LINE
LUER-LOCK
FITTINGS
WATER
TRAP
PATIENT
INTERFACE
PANEL
OXIMETER
SENSOR
SAMPLE
BP CUFF
CO2 CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER
CO2 CALIBRATION
GAS CYLINDER
Figure 5-13CAPNOMED SPAN CALIBRATION SETUP
Rev. G
5-35
SEMI-PERMEABLE
TUBE
SV81054
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE
6.0 PMC PROCEDURE, NARKOMED 3
The procedures in this section shall be performed in their entirety each time a
component is removed, replaced, calibrated, adjusted and during all scheduled Periodic
Manufacturer’s Certification (PMC) visits. A PMC checklist form, P/N S010004, available
from the Draeger Medical, Inc. Technical Service Department, shall be completed by the
TSR each time a PMC is performed.
NOTE:
Verify the dates on test equipment calibration labels. DO NOT USE any test
equipment having an expired calibration date. Notify your supervisor
immediately if any equipment is found to be out of calibration.
In the space provided at the bottom of the PMS checklist form, record the
Model and EL number of all calibrated test equipment used. Examples are:
multimeter, digital pressure meter, Riken gas analyzer, safety analyzer,
volumeter, trace gas analyzer, simulators, Eagle test equipment.
Rev. V
6-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
This page intentionally left blank
6-1A
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification General Instructions
The purpose of this manual is to provide detailed instructions for performing a Periodic Manufacturer’s
Certification (PMC) inspection on all models of Narkomed anesthesia machines.
A PMC consists of a complete Periodic Manufacturer’s Service procedure and a new certification level
inspection based on DMI Recommendations and equipment performance. Additional inspections are
also performed to insure proper product labeling.
Several additional documents have been created to ensure the success of this new program. Following
is a brief description of the purpose of each document.
Field Service Procedure:
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification Forms - Part Number SP00175.
This procedure illustrates sample checklists with typical periodic maintenance items filled in,
including vapor concentrations verification tests, parts replaced, general comments and certification
levels. Also included are sample PMC labels marked to show several levels of certifications. An excerpt
from DMI’s Anesthesia System Risk Analysis and Risk Reduction is included, and also a sample of an
Executive Summary to be furnished to the hospital’s Risk Manager or Chief of Anesthesia.
Field Service Procedure:
DMI Recommendations Guidelines Index Anesthesia Systems - Part Number S010250.
This Guideline was created to provide an assessment of each machine’s certification. It contains
various comprehensive overviews of possible equipment conditions and their associated certification
levels.
The first list in the Recommendation Guidelines is a reference chart for machine certification based
on equipment status. The second is an abbreviated summary of all DMI Recommendations and Failure
Codes including the Condition Number, Equipment Condition, Recommended Corrections, Certification
Code, and Tests Affected when applicable.
There is also a matrix classified as "Failure Codes" which identifies the correct manner in which to
document equipment tests that fail, or were unable to be performed due to circumstances beyond the
control of the service technician performing the inspection. (Ex: Air cylinder supply is unavailable to
perform Air High Pressure Leak test.) The Failure Codes section also indicates suggested resolution
of the situation. Failure Code numbers begin at 34 and use the same certification levels strategy, and
carry the same weight as DMI Recommendation equipment condition codes.
The next section of the guideline lists all DMI Recommendations identified at a machine’s major
assembly level. This section is divided into subsections titled: "Anesthesia System", "Vaporizers",
"Absorber System", "Ventilator" and "Scavenger System". The final matrix is the most comprehensive
index sorted by machine model and includes Equipment Condition, Certification Code, and DMI
Recommendations. It also specifies any suggested upgrade path including ordering information that
should be taken such as installing a Bellows with Pressure Limit Control 4109664-S01 Kit, after
market modification kit to a machine not equipped with pressure limit control.
Rev. V
6-1B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
The letters A, B, C, D and the Roman Numerals I, II are used as codes in the individual matrix for
each model of anesthesia machine. The letters A, B, C, and D are used in descending order to indicate
the certification level of the equipment. They are as follows:
A = Certified
B = Certified with Recommendations
C = Conditionally Certified
D = No Certification
Roman Numerals I and II do not affect the certification level but rather are provided to give further
instructions to the end user as follows:
I = The system in its present configuration shall only be used with a CO2 monitor incorporating
an apnea warning. The operator of the system is advised to frequently scan the CO2
readings and alarm thresholds.
II = The present configuration of equipment requires that the unit operate at all times with an
oxygen analyzer that includes a low oxygen warning. The operator of the system is advised
to frequently scan the oxygen readings and alarm limits.
Following is an explanation of machine certification levels:
Certified- No recommendations apply to machine being inspected. (Only item number 33 - "No
Recommendations" shall apply for this certification level.)
Certified with Recommendations- A numbered recommendation with a code of B applies to the
machine being examined.
Conditionally Certified- A numbered recommendation with a code of BCI or BCII applies to the
machine being examined.
No Certification- A numbered recommendation with a code of D applies to the machine being
examined.
When multiple recommendations apply, "No Certification" would take precedence over "Conditionally
Certified" and "Certified with Recommendations". "Conditionally Certified" would take precedence over
"Certified with Recommendations".
For example:
A narkomed Compact could have recommendation numbers 8, 10, 11, and 18 apply.
# 8- Oxygen analyzer is not interfaced with the anesthesia machine. Code is BCII.
# 10- Pressure monitor is not interfaced with anesthesia ventilator. Code is B.
# 11- Ventilator is equipped with descending bellows. Code is BCI.
# 48.1- O2 analyzer is nonfunctional. Code is D.
The correct certification for this machine is D, which means "NO CERTIFICATION".
A Narkomed Standard could have recommendation numbers 2, 10, and 48.2 apply.
# 2- No oxygen pressure depletion warning. Code is BCII.
# 10- Pressure monitor is not interfaced with anesthesia ventilator. Code is B.
# 48.2 O2 analyzer is non functional. Code is D.
The correct certification for this machine is D, which means "NO CERTIFICATION".
6-1C
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Another Narkomed Standard could have recommendation numbers 2, 10, and 11 apply.
# 2- No oxygen pressure depletion warning. Code is BCII.
# 10- Pressure monitor is not interfaced with anesthesia ventilator. Code is B.
# 11- Ventilator is equipped with descending bellows. Code is BCI.
The correct certification for this machine is BCI and BCII, which means "CERTIFIED WITH
RECOMMENDATIONS and CONDITIONALLY CERTIFIED with conditions I and II"
The reason for this is that BCI and BCII both mean that the machine is certified with
recommendations (B), conditionally certified (C), with condition (I) and condition (II) equally applied.
A Narkomed 2A could have recommendation numbers 6 and 30 apply.
# 6- ORM instead of ORMc. Code is BCII.
# 30- Anesthesia machine is equipped with inhalation anesthesia vaporizers without an agent monitor
in the breathing system. Code is B.
The correct certification for this machine is BCII, which means "CERTIFIED with
RECOMMENDATIONS and CONDITIONALLY CERTIFIED with condition II"
A Narkomed 2B could have recommendation numbers 25 and 30 apply.
# 25- PEEP device on 22mm terminal of expiratory valve. Code is BCI.
# 30- Anesthesia machine is equipped with inhalation anesthesia vaporizers without an agent monitor
in the breathing system. Code is B.
The correct certification for this machine is BCI, which means "CERTIFIED with
RECOMMENDATIONS, and CONDITIONALLY CERTIFIED with condition (I) applied.
A Narkomed 4 could have recommendation number 28 apply.
# 28- Absorber PEEP valve does not have bypass valve. Code is B.
The correct certification for this machine is B, which
RECOMMENDATIONS"
means
"CERTIFIED
with
A Narkomed 2C (incorporating a VA3200 in the anesthesia workstation) may not have any
recommendation numbers apply.
The correct certification for this machine is A, which means "CERTIFIED".
Code, D which means "NO CERTIFICATION", also means the machine shall not receive a
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification label. The machine shall receive a "WARNING - This
System Is Not Certified" label. This label shall be placed at a prominent location on the
right side of the machine after all other previous PM and "Vigilance Audit® Validation"
labels have been removed.
After a period of one year if any of the following Equipment Conditions still apply, the
machine will not be certified under the Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification program. The
machine shall not receive a Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification label. The machine shall
receive a "WARNING - This is a vintage machine . . ." label. This label shall be placed at a
prominent location on the right side of the machine after all other previous PM and
"Vigilance Audit® Validation" labels have been removed.
Rev. V
6-1D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 3 Anesthesia System
1.
Use the PM Certification form for Narkomed Anesthesia Systems (P/N S010004).
2.
Completely fill in the header information.
3.
Determine if the ventilator has an MJV-2 square Clippard valve. If ventilator has an MJV-2, perform the
lubrication procedure in accordance with SP00062. Write in the date of lubrication next to the "MJV-2
LUBRICATION" line on the Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification form. If the ventilator has a Humphrey
valve, indicate so with a (H) next to the "MJV-2 LUBRICATION" line on the Periodic Manufacturer’s
Certification form.
4.
Replace the VENTILATOR RELIEF VALVE DIAPHRAGM in accordance with SP00075. Place a check mark
and the replacement date at "VENT RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT" line on the Periodic Manufacturer’s
Certification form.
5.
If a TEC 6 DESFLURANE vaporizer is mounted to the machine, a label stating: "WARNING THE
ADMINISTRATION OF DESFLURANE ANESTHESIA MAY REQUIRE FRESH GAS CONCENTRATIONS
HIGHER THAN COMMONLY USED WITH OTHER VOLATILE ANESTHETIC AGENTS. O2 FRESH GAS
CONCENTRATION OF LESS THAN 21% MAY BE OBTAINED WITH HIGH VAPORIZER SETTINGS.
CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE O2 CONCENTRATION IN THE BREATHING SYSTEM IS
THEREFORE REQUIRED. NORTH AMERICAN DRÄGER RECOMMENDS THE CONTINUOUS
MONITORING OF THE CONCENTRATION OF ANESTHETIC VAPORS IN THE BREATHING SYSTEM
DURING THE ADMINISTRATION OF INHALATION ANESTHESIA."(part # 4112737-001) Shall be
attached to the vapor box immediately above the TEC 6 vaporizer.
6.
Check all vapor 19 and 19.1 vaporizers for correct labeling. All vaporizers must have a label stating "THE
CONCENTRATION OUTPUT OF THIS VAPORIZER SHALL BE VERIFIED AFTER IT HAS BEEN
ATTACHED TO THE ANESTHESIA MACHINE" (part # S010015). This label shall be attached to the rear
of the vaporizer directly below the mount.
7.
All Key Index Safety Systems vaporizers, (K.I.S.S.) must have a label stating "CAUTION: AFTER FILLING
HAS BEEN COMPLETED, REINSERT PLUG INTO UPPER FILLER PORT AND TIGHTEN LOCKING
SCREW" (part # 4112520-001). This label shall be attached to the vaporizer directly above the keyed filler.
Place a check mark at "K.I.S.S. LABEL" on the PM Certification form.
8.
Perform Narkomed 2A/3 Caster Inspection in accordance with SP0006. Place a check mark at "2A/3 Caster
Inspection". If inspection is not applicable, indicate with (N/A) on line next to "2A/3 Caster Inspection".
9.
If machine is equipped with a HALOTHANE Dräger Vapor 19 or 19.1 vaporizer, determine if vaporizer must
be inspected for soil condition one. Check the serial number plate located on the rear of the vaporizer for
a plus (+) preceding the serial number. A HALOTHANE vaporizer serial number not preceded with a (+)
must be tested for soil in accordance with SP00073. If vaporizer does not need to be inspected, indicate so
with a plus (+) next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on the Vigilance Audit form. If vaporizer is soil
condition 0, indicate so with "SOIL 0" written next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on the Vigilance Audit
form. If vaporizer is soil one, indicate so with "SOIL 1" written next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on
the Vigilance Audit form. Place a "CAUTION DO NOT USE" label (part # 4114327) on the vaporizer, and
issue a departmental alert. The TSR shall also seek permission from the equipment operator to remove the
failed vaporizer from the machine and apply a replacement vaporizer or an adapter block onto the mount.
All "SOIL 1" vaporizers must be removed from service for machine to receive certification.
6-1E
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 3 Anesthesia System
10.
Perform the vapor concentration test on all Dräger vapor vaporizers in accordance with SP00073 at a six
month maximum interval. Perform the vaporizer concentration test on all Desflurane vaporizers in
accordance with SP00091 for fixed mount vaporizers and SP00189 for user removable D-tec vaporizers at
a six month maximum interval. For every vaporizer tested, fill out a "VAPOR VAPORIZER CALIBRATION
CHECK" label (part # S010016). Information on this label shall include your signature, type of agent, date
tested, test results @ 1%, 2.5%, 4% for H, E, I, or S vaporizers, or @ 4%, 10%, 12%, 16% for Desflurane
vaporizers, and a PASS or FAIL indication. This label shall be attached to the upper right side of the
vaporizer. If vaporizer fails the concentration verification, internal leak, or exclusion system tests, check
"NO" in the "RECOMMENDED FOR USE" section on the PM Certification form.
Place a "CAUTION DO NOT USE" label (part # 4114327) on the vaporizer, and issue a departmental alert.
The TSR shall also seek permission from the equipment operator to remove the failed vaporizer from the
machine and install a replacement vaporizer or an adapter block onto the mount. All nonfunctional Dräger
vapor vaporizers must be removed from service for the machine to receive certification.
11.
Proceed with PM Certification procedure. If any tests fail refer to the "Failure Codes" listing in DMI
Recommendations Guidelines Index (P/N S010250) to determine correct certification level starting point.
Failure codes shall be documented on the "RECOMMENDATIONS / GENERAL COMMENTS" section of
the PM Certification form and on the Executive Summary. If a test fails that has not been identified by the
"Failure Codes" list, consult with Draeger Medical, Inc. to assess the proper certification level.
12.
Based on the "EQUIPMENT CONDITION" inspect the machine for any "DMI RECOMMENDATIONS" that
would apply. Use the Narkomed 3 section of the "RECOMMENDATION GUIDELINES INDEX" (P/N
S010250). Note all applicable DMI recommendations on the Executive Summary. NOTE: If using a carbon
form, indicate the Equipment Condition number and to see reverse side under the "RECOMMENDATIONS
/ GENERAL COMMENTS" section of the form.
13.
Determine the correct certification level of the machine based on the combined lowest common denominator
of "Equipment Conditions" and "Failure Codes". If the machine is at least conditionally certified fill out the
"PM CERTIFICATION" label. Check the box(s) on the validation label where appropriate. Write the month
and year, (three months from date of PM Certification) next to "NEXT VISIT DUE:" If certification level is
"D", machine shall not receive a "PM CERTIFICATION" label. Any machine not receiving a PM Certification
label shall receive a "WARNING NOT CERTIFIED" label. This label shall be placed at a prominent location
on the left side of the machine after all other previous PMS and Vigilance Audit Validation labels have been
removed.
14.
In the "CERTIFICATION LEVEL" section of the PM Certification form, record the last visit certification
level, the current certification level and the next visit due month and year, (three months from date of PM
Certification) in the spaces provided.
15.
If applicable, remove the previous PM CERTIFICATION VALIDATION label and attach the new label (P/N
S010006 w/phone #, or P/N S010007 w/o phone #) in a prominent location on the rear of the anesthesia
machine.
16.
Check the appropriate boxes on the "PM CERTIFICATION NOTICE" label, (part # S010011). If the machine
is not certified, the last box of this notice label shall be marked. Attach this notice to the flow shield of the
anesthesia machine.
17.
Have the customer sign each PM Certification form or the Executive Summary, and review the equipment
conditions and the recommendations with the customer.
18.
Return top copy to DMI Service Department, keep middle copy for service organization records, give bottom
copy to customer.
Rev. V
6-1F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
( ) 6.1 Manual Sphygmomanometer
6.1.1
Insert the male Luer fitting of the Sphygmomanometer squeeze bulb-hose
assembly into the female Luer fitting labeled BP BULB on the front of
the machine.
6.1.2
Wrap the blood pressure cuff around an "E" cylinder.
6.1.3
Hand-pump the squeeze bulb until pressure of 200 mm Hg is indicated
on the Sphygmomanometer gauge on the machine. Pinch the hose
adjacent to the Luer fitting to assure that the hose-bulb is not the source
of any leak.
6.1.4
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure on the Sphygmomanometer
gauge? ___ mm Hg (190-200)
6.1.5
Bleed the pressure.
6.1.6
The Sphygmomanometer should indicate within the band.
6.1.7
Attach a test Sphygmomanometer in series with the gauge being tested.
6.1.8
Hand-pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates 100 mm
Hg.
6.1.9
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (90-110).
6.1.10
Hand-pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates 200 mm
Hg.
6.1.11
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (180-220).
6.1.12
Hand-pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates 300 mm
Hg.
6.1.13
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (270-330).
6.1.14
Remove the test gauge.
6.1.15
Remove the blood pressure cuff from the "E" cylinder.
6-2
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( ) 6.2 Yoke Assemblies and Gauges
6.2.1
Yoke Assemblies (All Gases)
6.2.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.2.1.2
Disconnect the pipeline supply and/or close the cylinders.
6.2.1.3
Remove cylinder or yoke plug from each yoke assembly.
6.2.1.4
Are the two (2) yoke pins installed securely in each yoke? ___ (Y)
6.2.1.5
Is there only one (1) cylinder washer on each yoke assembly? ___ (Y)
6.2.1.6
Is there a yoke plug attached to each yoke assembly? ___ (Y)
6.2.1.7
Is the proper gas identification label affixed to each yoke assembly?
___ (Y)
6.2.1.8
Attach a cylinder to each yoke assembly, open the cylinder valve, let
the pressure stabilize, close the cylinder valve, and remove the
cylinder from the yoke assembly.
6.2.1.9
Does the yoke check valve assembly prevent the escape of excessive
pressure? ___ (Y)
6.2.1.10 Attach the cylinders to the yokes, or reinsert the yoke plugs.
Rev. V
6-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.2.2
NM3
Cylinder Gauges
6.2.2.1
Are the gauges closest to the table top for cylinder supply pressure?
___ (Y)
6.2.2.2
Bleed all pressure from the cylinder circuit.
6.2.2.3
Are the cylinder gauges at zero (0) PSI? ___ (Y)
6.2.2.4
Open the cylinder valves.
6.2.2.5
Do the cylinder pressure gauges respond properly? ___ (Y)
6.2.3
Pipeline Gauges
6.2.3.1
Are the gauges closest to the flowmeters for pipeline supply pressure?
___ (Y)
6.2.3.2
Are the pipeline pressure gauges at zero (0) PSI? ___ (Y)
6.2.3.3
Connect the pipeline supply.
6.2.3.4
Do the pipeline pressure gauges respond properly? ___ (Y)
6.2.3.5
Are the correct gas identification labels affixed at each of the pipeline
inlets? ___ (Y)
6.2.3.6
Does the back panel identify each of the pipeline inlets properly? ___
(Y)
6-4
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( ) 6.3 High Pressure Leak Test
6.3.1
Oxygen High Pressure Leak Test
6.3.1.1
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
6.3.1.2
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.3.1.3
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.
6.3.1.4
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.3.1.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.3.1.6
Observe the oxygen cylinder pressure gauge.
6.3.1.7
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.3.1.8
Attach the cylinder.
6.3.1.9
Repeat the procedure for the second O2 yoke, if applicable.
6.3.2
Nitrous Oxide High Pressure Leak Test
6.3.2.1
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.3.2.2
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve and one (1) nitrous oxide cylinder
valve.
6.3.2.3
Adjust the oxygen flow to 8 lpm.
6.3.2.4
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.3.2.5
Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.3.2.6
Observe the nitrous oxide cylinder pressure gauge.
6.3.2.7
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.3.2.8
Attach the cylinder.
6.3.2.9
Repeat the procedure for the second N2O yoke,if applicable.
6.3.2.10 Close the oxygen flow control valve.
Rev. V
6-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.3.3
NM3
Air High Pressure Leak Test - If Applicable
6.3.3.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.3.3.2
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.3.3.3
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.3.3.4
Close the air cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.3.3.5
Observe the air cylinder pressure gauge.
6.3.3.6
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.3.3.7
Attach the air cylinder.
6.3.3.8
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.3.4
Oxygen-Helium High Pressure Leak Test - If Applicable
6.3.4.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.3.4.2
Open the oxygen-helium cylinder valve.
6.3.4.3
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.3.4.4
Close the oxygen-helium cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.3.4.5
Observe the oxygen-helium cylinder pressure gauge.
6.3.4.6
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.3.4.7
Attach the oxygen-helium cylinder.
6.3.4.8
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-6
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.3.5
Rev. V
Carbon Dioxide High Pressure Leak Test - If Applicable
6.3.5.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.3.5.2
Open the carbon dioxide cylinder valve.
6.3.5.3
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.3.5.4
Close the carbon dioxide cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.3.5.5
Observe the carbon dioxide cylinder pressure gauge.
6.3.5.6
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.3.5.7
Attach the carbon dioxide cylinder.
6.3.5.8
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.4 Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm
( )
6.4.1
Remove the table top from the machine.
6.4.2
Remove the plug from the tee fitting on the regulator output line and
connect a test gauge.
6.4.3
Open and close an oxygen cylinder valve.
6.4.4
Set the oxygen flow to 2 lpm.
6.4.5
What is the pressure on the test gauge when the O2 SUPPLY PRESSURE
alarm lamp lights? ___PSI (27-33)
6.4.6
Verify that the LO O2 SUPPLY Caution message is displayed.
6.4.7
Bleed all oxygen from the circuit, remove the test gauge and reinstall the
plug in the tee fitting.
6.4.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.4.9
Reinstall the table top.
6-8
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( ) 6.5 Oxygen Supply Failure Protection
6.5.1
Nitrous Oxide O.F.P. Device
6.5.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.5.1.2
Disconnect the pipeline supply hoses.
6.5.1.3
Open the N2O cylinder valve.
6.5.1.4
Open and close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.1.5
Set the O2 and N2O flows to 4 l/min.
6.5.1.6
Does the flow of nitrous oxide cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.7
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.1.8
Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve, and bleed the pressure from
the circuit.
6.5.1.9
Open the N2O pipeline supply valve.
6.5.1.10 Open and close the O2 pipeline supply valve.
6.5.1.11 Does the flow of nitrous oxide cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.12 Close the O2 and nitrous oxide flow control valves.
Rev. V
6-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.5.2
NM3
Air O.F.P. Device - If Applicable
6.5.2.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.5.2.2
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.5.2.3
Open an oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.2.4
Set the air flow to 4 lpm.
6.5.2.5
Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.5.2.6
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.2.7
Does the flow of air cease when the oxygen pressure is depleted? ___
(Y)
6.5.2.8
Open the oxygen cylinder valve, close the air cylinder valve, and
bleed pressure from the circuit.
6.5.2.9
Close the oxygen and air flow control valves.
6.5.2.10 Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.5.3
Oxygen-Helium O.F.P. Device - If Applicable
6.5.3.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.5.3.2
Open the oxygen-helium cylinder valve.
6.5.3.3
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.3.4
Set the oxygen-helium flow to 4 lpm; set the oxygen flow to 4 lpm.
6.5.3.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.3.6
Does the flow of oxygen-helium cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.5.3.7
Close the oxygen-helium flow control valve.
6.5.3.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.5.3.9
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.5.3.10 Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-10
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.5.4
Rev. V
Carbon Dioxide O.F.P. Device - If Applicable
6.5.4.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.5.4.2
Open the cylinder of carbon dioxide.
6.5.4.3
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.4.4
Set the carbon dioxide flow to 500 ml/min.
6.5.4.5
Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.5.4.6
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.4.7
Does the flow of carbon dioxide cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.5.4.8
Close the carbon dioxide and oxygen flow control valves.
6.5.4.9
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
( ) 6.6 O2MED Offset Calibration
6.6.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.6.2
Press and hold the
and
keys on the oxygen monitor panel, and
turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.6.3
Verify a monitor display of 100 ±1.
6.6.4
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
( ) 6.7 O2MED Calibration, Accuracy and Alarms Test
6.7.1
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.7.2
Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve dome and
disconnect the oxygen sensor cable at the interface panel.
6.7.3
The alarm CRT shall display the following messages: "O2 SENS DISC",
"O2 NOT CAL", "O2 ALRM OFF".
6.7.4
Reconnect the O2 Med sensor cable.
6.7.5
Press the O2CAL key on the monitor.
6.7.6
After calibration is completed, what is the oxygen concentration? ___ %
(21)
6.7.7
The alarm CRT shall display "% OXYGEN LOW" under the warning
heading and the heading shall be flashing. There should be a continuous
audible alarm.
6.7.8
Press the LO oxygen alarm key.
6.7.9
Using the
and
from 21 to 99%.
6.7.10
Set the low limit to 21.
6.7.11
Press the HI oxygen alarm key.
6.7.12
Using the
and
from 100 to 22%.
6.7.13
Set the high alarm to 22.
keys, verify that the low alarm limit has a range
keys, verify that the high alarm limit has a range
6-12
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.7.14
Expose the O2 Med sensor to 50% oxygen.
6.7.15
The alarm CRT shall display "% OXYGEN HI" in the Advisory column.
6.7.16
Adjust the high alarm to 51%.
6.7.17
The "% OXYGEN HI" message will now be extinguished.
6.7.18
Return the high alarm to 100.
6.7.19
Place the sensor into the valve dome, set the oxygen flow to 5 lpm, set the
Man/Auto to BAG, close the APL valve, attach a 12-inch hose to the
inspiratory valve and occlude the bag mount.
6.7.20
After 3 minutes, what is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (97-100)
6.7.21
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
( ) 6.8 Oxygen Concentration Test
6.8.1
Oxygen + Nitrous Oxide Concentration Test
6.8.1.1
Connect a 12-inch hose to the inspiratory valve.
6.8.1.2
Set the Manual/Automatic to BAG.
6.8.1.3
Close the APL valve.
6.8.1.4
Occlude the bag mount.
6.8.1.5
Insert the sensor from a calibrated O2Med into the valve dome
adapter on the inspiratory valve.
6.8.1.6
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.1.7
Set the oxygen flow to 4 lpm.
6.8.1.8
Does the O2Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.8.1.9
Set the nitrous oxide flow to 2 lpm.
6.8.1.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (64-70)
6.8.1.11 Close the oxygen and nitrous oxide flow control valves.
6.8.2
Oxygen + Air Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.8.2.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.8.2.2
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.2.3
Does the O2Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.8.2.4
Set the oxygen flow to 4lpm.
6.8.2.5
Set the air flow to 2 lpm.
6.8.2.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (71-77)
6.8.2.7
Close the oxygen and air flow control valves.
6.8.2.8
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-14
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.8.3
6.8.3.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.8.3.2
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.3.3
Does the O2Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.8.3.4
Set the oxygen + helium flow to 2 lpm.
6.8.3.5
Set the oxygen flow to 4 lpm.
6.8.3.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (72-78)
6.8.3.7
Close the oxygen + helium flow control valve.
6.8.3.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.8.3.9
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.8.4
Rev. V
Oxygen + Oxygen-Helium Concentration Test - If Applicable
Oxygen + Carbon Dioxide Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.8.4.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.8.4.2
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.4.3
Does the O2MED read 97-100% within 3 minutes?
___ (Y)
6.8.4.4
Set the oxygen flow to 1000 ml/min.
6.8.4.5
Set the carbon dioxide flow to 500 ml/min.
6.8.4.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (64-70)
6.8.4.7
Close the carbon dioxide flow control valve.
6.8.4.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.8.4.9
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.8.5
NM3
Oxygen + Nitrogen Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.8.5.1
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.5.2
Does the O2MED read 97-100% within 3 minutes?___ (Y)
6.8.5.3
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.8.5.4
Set O2 flow to 4 l/min; nitrogen flow to 2 l/min.
6.8.5.5
What is the oxygen concentration after 3 minutes? ___ % (64-70)
6.8.5.6
Close the nitrogen flow control valve.
6.8.5.7
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.8.5.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.8.6
Oxygen + Helium Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.8.6.1
Depress the O2 FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.8.6.2
Does the O2 MED read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.8.6.3
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.8.6.4
Set O2 flow to 4 l/min; helium flow to 2 l/min.
6.8.6.5
What is the oxygen concentration after 3 minutes? ___% (64-70)
6.8.6.6
Close the helium flow control valve.
6.8.6.7
Set the gas selector switch to O2 + N2O.
6.8.6.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6-15A
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
This page intentionally left blank
Rev. V
6-15B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
( ) 6.9 Flowmeter Test
6.9.1
Oxygen Flowmeter Test
6.9.1.1
Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of the
flowmeters? ___ (Y)
6.9.1.2
Close the O2 cylinder valve, bleed the pressure, and reconnect the
pipeline hoses.
6.9.1.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of the
flowmeters? ___ (Y)
6.9.1.4
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the oxygen flow
control valve? ___ (Y)
6.9.1.5
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.9.1.6
What is the minimum flow of oxygen? ___ ml ( 125-175 ml/min; 0 ml
for 4107615A (Minimum O2 Flow Elimination))
6.9.2
Nitrous Oxide Flowmeter Test
6.9.2.1
Set the oxygen flow to 4 lpm.
6.9.2.2
Open the nitrous oxide cylinder valve.
6.9.2.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full range of
the flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.9.2.4
Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve, bleed the pressure, and
reconnect the pipeline hose.
6.9.2.5
Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full range of
the flowmeters? ___ (Y)
6.9.2.6
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the N2O flow
control valve? ___ (Y)
6.9.2.7
Close the oxygen and nitrous oxide flow control valves.
6-16
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.9.3
6.9.3.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.9.3.2
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.9.3.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of the air over the full range of the
flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.9.3.4
Close the air cylinder valve; bleed the pressure and reconnect the
pipeline hose.
6.9.3.5
Is it possible to adjust the flow of air over the full range of the
flowmeter?
6.9.3.6
Close the air flow control valve.
6.9.3.7
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the air flow
control valve? ___ (Y)
6.9.3.8
What is the minimum flow of oxygen? ___ ml (0)
6.9.3.9
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.9.4
Rev. V
Air Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
Oxygen-Helium Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
6.9.4.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.9.4.2
Open the oxygen-helium gas cylinder valve.
6.9.4.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of the oxygen-helium over the full
range of the flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.9.4.4
Close the oxygen-helium flow control valve.
6.9.4.5
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the oxygenhelium flow control valve? ___ (Y)
6.9.4.6
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.9.5
NM3
Carbon Dioxide Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
6.9.5.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.9.5.2
Open the carbon dioxide gas cylinder valve.
6.9.5.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of the carbon dioxide over the full
range of the flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.9.5.4
Close the carbon dioxide flow control valve.
6.9.5.5
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the carbon
dioxide flow control valve? ___ (Y)
6.9.5.6
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
6.9.6
Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
6.9.6.1
Connect a test cm H2O gauge to the outlet.
6.9.6.2
Bleed any pressure.
6.9.6.3
Is there an increase in pressure? ___ (N)
6.9.6.4
Increase the pressure to 50 cm H2O.
6.9.6.5
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure? ___ cm H2O (30-50)
6.9.6.6
Remove the test gauge.
6.9.6.7
Is it possible to adjust the flow over the full range of the flowmeter?
___ (Y)
6.9.6.8
Adjust the flow to 5 lpm.
6.9.6.9
Hold the sensor from a calibrated O2Med at the flowmeter outlet.
6.9.6.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (97-100)
6.9.6.11 Remove the O2Med sensor.
6.9.6.12 Close the flowmeter flow control valve.
6-18
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
6.10
( )
( )
( )
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Freshgas Leak Test
6.10.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.10.2
Remove the 15 mm connector from the FRESHGAS OUTLET.
6.10.3
Is the common gas outlet assembly in good condition? ___ (Y)
6.10.4
Connect a digital pressure manometer and Fresh Gas Leak Test Device
to the freshgas outlet.
6.10.5
Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.
6.10.6
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___
(>40 cm H2O)
6.10.7
Turn on the left mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking.
6.10.8
Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.
6.10.9
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___
(>40 cm H2O)
6.10.10
Turn off the vaporizer.
6.10.11
Remove the test equipment from the Fresh Gas Outlet.
6.10.12
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.10.13
Open the O2 flow control valve to 5 l/min., purge the system for 5 seconds,
then close the O2 flow control valve.
6.10.14
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.10.15
Turn on the center mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking,
repeat Steps 6.10.8 thru 6.10.14. ___ (>40 cm H2O)
6.10.16
Turn on the right mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking,
repeat Steps 6.12.8 thru 6.12.14. ___ (>40 cm H2O)
6.10.17
Remove the manometer and Fresh Gas Leak Test Device.
6.10.18
Reconnect the 15 mm connector from the absorber system to the
FRESHGAS OUTLET.
6.10.19
Is the FRESHGAS OUTLET label on the freshgas outlet? ___ (Y)
6-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( ) 6.11
NM3
Repack MAN/AUTO Selector Valve
6.11.1
Remove the four screws securing the stick shift block to the selector valve
body and remove the block.
6.11.2
Remove the spring and valve channel from the valve body.
6.11.3
Remove all residual lubricant from the valve channel.
6.11.4
Remove all residual lubricant from the valve body.
6.11.5
Apply a minimal amount of "stop cock" lubricant to the tapered surface
of the valve channel, and ensure complete coverage of lubricant.
6.11.6
Insert the valve channel into the valve body.
6.11.7
Insert the spring into the stick shift block.
6.11.8
Align the index pins on the stick shift block to the holes in the valve
channel.
6.11.9
Secure the stick shift block to the selector valve body with the four screws
that were previously removed.
6-20
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( ) 6.12
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Absorber System Inspection
6.12.1
Remove the inspiratory and the expiratory valve domes.
6.12.2
Is there a broken or bent pin on the valve assembly?
Inspiratory ___ (N)
Expiratory ___ (N)
6.12.3
Is there a broken pin on the valve domes?
Inspiratory ___ (N)
Expiratory ___ (N)
6.12.4
Is the valve disc in good condition?
Inspiratory ___ (Y)
Expiratory ___ (Y)
6.12.5
Are the valve dome washers in good condition? ___ (Y)
6.12.6
Reinstall the inspiratory and expiratory valve domes.
6.12.7
Are there two (2) spring clips on the absorber rods? ___(Y)
6.12.8
Is the cm H2O gauge at zero (0)? ___(Y)
6.12.9
Remove the O2Med sensor plug from the inspiratory valve dome adapter
and examine the two O-rings at the bottom of the plug.
6.12.10
Uncap the O2Med sensor and examine the two O-rings at the bottom of
the sensor.
6.12.11
Reinstall the O2Med sensor into the inspiratory valve dome adapter.
6-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( ) 6.13
NM3
Lubrication, Spiromed Sensor
6.13.1
Remove the expiratory valve.
6.13.2
Remove the Spiromed Sensor.
6.13.3
Locate the four lateral holes at the sides of the Spiromed sensor marked
by printed arrows.
CAUTION:
Use only Sensor Lubrication Kit P/N 221818 P for the following
procedure.
6.13.4
Remove the protective cover from the pipette and open the lubricant
bottle.
6.13.5
Dip the tip of the pipette into the lubricant and draw one drop of
lubricant into the pipette by pulling the pin upwards.
6.13.6
Insert the pipette into one of the four holes as far as it will go. Push the
pin forward to its stop to inject lubricant into the hole.
6.13.7
Repeat the procedure on the three remaining holes.
6.13.8
Wipe any lubricant residue from the exterior of the sensor.
6.13.9
Reattach the sensor to the absorber top dome.
6.13.10
Reattach the expiratory valve to the sensor.
6-22
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( ) 6.14
( ) 6.15
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Breathing System Leak test
6.14.1
Interconnect the inspiratory and expiratory valves with a 12 in. hose with
22 mm ends (P/N 9995112).
6.14.2
Attach a test terminal (P/N 4104389) with a cuff inflation bulb and hose
assembly (P/N 4109398) to the bag mount.
6.14.3
Set the Man/Auto selector valve to BAG, and close the APL valve (fully
clockwise).
6.14.4
Apply 50 cm H2O pressure to the absorber system.
6.14.5
After 30 seconds, what is the pressure in the absorber system? ___ cm
H2O (>30)
Absorber Flow Direction and Leak Test
6.15.1
Expiration Valve Leak Test
6.15.1.1 Close the APL valve.
6.15.1.2 Connect a 22mm hose between the inspiration valve and the bag
mount.
6.15.1.3 Connect a test terminal to the expiration valve.
6.15.1.4 Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the test terminal.
6.15.1.5 Turn the System Power switch to ON, turn up the oxgen flow until
the system pressurizes to 30 cmH2O.
6.15.1.6 Verify that the value indicated on the flowmeter is ≤60ml/min.
6.15.1.7 Remove all test equipment.
6.15.2
Inspiratory valve leak test
6.15.2.1 Connect a test terminal to the inspiratory valve.
6.15.2.2 Connect a tee adapter and calibrated pressure meter to the test
terminal.
6.15.2.3 Connect a pressure bulb to the open port of the tee adapter.
Rev. V
6-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.15.2.4 Connect another test terminal to the bag connector.
6.15.2.5 Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the test terminal on the bag
mount.
6.15.2.6 Pressurize the system to 30 cmH2O.
6.15.2.7 Verify that the flow meter indicates ≤60 ml/min.
6.15.2.8 Remove all test equipment.
6.15.2.9 Open the APL valve.
6.15.3
Flow Direction Test
6.15.3.1 Attach a breathing circuit with a 3-liter bag at the Y-piece to the
inspiration and expiration valves.
6.15.3.2 Attach a 3-liter bag to the swivel bag mount.
6.15.3.3 Set the O2 flow to 4 l/min.
6.15.3.4 Inflate the simulated lung by briefly using the O2 Flush.
6.15.3.5 Partially close the APL valve.
6.15.3.6 Squeeze the breathing bag attached to the bag mount at a rate of
approximately 10 BPM. Readjust the APL valve if required to
properly ventilate the simulated lung.
6.15.3.7 Observe the operation of each unidirectional valve disc at eye level
and make sure the inspiratory valve disc raises only during the
inspiration phase, and the expiratory valve raises only during the
exhalation phase. Watch the valves until satisfied that both valves
operate correctly, and move freely without sticking.
6.15.3.8 Open the APL valve.
6-24
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( ) 6.16
( ) 6.17
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
APL Valve Test
6.16.1
Open the APL valve to its stop.
6.16.2
Turn the SYSTEM POWER switch to ON.
6.16.3
Set the oxygen flow to 8 lpm.
6.16.4
What is the pressure on the absorber pressure gauge? ___ cm H2O (<3)
PEEP Bypass Valve - If applicable.
6.17.1
Set the O2 flow to 5 l/min.
6.17.2
Adjust the PEEP valve clockwise to the maximum position.
6.17.3
Raise the bypass valve to the "PEEP ON" position.
6.17.4
What is the maximum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (15-22 cm H2O).
6.17.5
Does the PEEP valve adjust smoothly? ___ (Y)
6.17.6
Adjust the PEEP valve counter-clockwise to its minimum position.
6.17.7
What is the minimum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (2-3 cm H2O).
6.17.8
Adjust the PEEP valve clockwise to its maximum position.
6.17.9
Lower the bypass valve to the "PEEP OFF" position.
6.17.10
What is the maximum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (2-3 cm H2O)
6.17.11
Adjust the PEEP valve counter-clockwise to its minimum position.
6.17.12
Close the O2 flow control valve.
6-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.18
NM3
Ventilator Test
6.18.1
6.18.1.1 Set the Manual/Automatic selector to AUTO.
6.18.1.2 Set the FREQUENCY to 10.
6.18.1.3 Set the I:E RATIO to 1:2.
6.18.1.4 Set the Tidal Volume to 1000 ml.
6.18.1.5 Attach a patient circuit to the absorber system.
6.18.1.6 Adjust the O2 flow to 3 lpm.
6.18.1.7 Allow the bellows to inflate.
6.18.1.8 Is the "APNEA-P OFF" message displayed in the ADVISORY column?
___ (Y) (if no, press the "APNEA ALARM DISABLE" key)
6.18.1.9 Is "VOL-ALARM OFF" message displayed in the ADVISORY column?
___ (Y) (if no, press the "VOLUME ALARM DISABLE" key)
( )
6.18.1.10
Turn the ventilator on.
6.18.1.11
Do the "APNEA-P OFF" and "VOL-ALARM OFF" messages
disappear from the ADVISORY column? ___ (Y)
6.18.1.12
Adjust the INSPIRATORY FLOW to the maximum of the LOW
zone.
6.18.1.13
Occlude the Y-piece with your thumb.
6.18.1.14
What is the peak inspiratory pressure? ___ cm H2O (>30)
6-26
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.18.2
Inspiratory : Expiratory Ratio
6.18.2.1 Attach a test lung to the Y-piece.
6.18.2.2 Using a stopwatch, time the inspiratory phase.
6.18.2.3 What is the inspiratory time? ___ seconds (1.8-2.2)
6.18.2.4 Using a stopwatch, time the expiratory phase.
6.18.2.5 What is the expiratory time? ___ seconds (3.6-4.4)
( )
6.18.3
Frequency Test
6.18.3.1 Adjust the FREQUENCY and I:E RATIO through the following
settings:
FREQUENCY
I:E RATIO
11
1:1
22
1:1.5
33
1:2
44
1:2.5
55
1:3
66
1:3.5
77
1:4
88
1:4.5
99
1:4.5
6.18.3.2
Rev. V
Does the ventilator cycle properly? ___ (Y)
6-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.18.4
NM3
"F" Bellows Test
6.18.4.1
Set the FREQUENCY to 10.
6.18.4.2
Set the I:E RATIO to 1:2.
6.18.4.3
Adjust the O2 flow to 300 ml.
6.18.4.4
Adjust the INSPIRATORY FLOW to MED.
6.18.4.5
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 200 ml.
6.18.4.6
What is the Tidal Volume on the Spiromed(B)? ___ ml
(125-250)
6.18.4.7
this step intentionally left blank
6.18.4.8
this step intentionally left blank
6.18.4.9
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 1000 ml.
6.18.4.10
What is the Tidal Volume on the Spiromed(B)? ___ ml
(900-1100)
6.18.4.11
Adjust the INSPIRATORY FLOW to HIGH.
6.18.4.12
this step intentionally left blank
6.18.4.13
this step intentionally left blank
6.18.4.14
Adjust the O2 flow to 5 lpm.
6.18.4.15
this step intentionally left blank.
6.18.4.16
Adjust the Tidal Volume to maximum.
6.18.4.17
What is the Tidal Volume on the test volumeter? ___
ml (>1400)
6-28
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
( )
Rev. V
6.19
6.20
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Ventilator Relief Valve Test
6.19.1
Adjust the O2 flow to 10 lpm.
6.19.2
Adjust the INSPIRATORY FLOW to MED.
6.19.3
Adjust the I:E RATIO to 1:3.
6.19.4
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 1200 ml.
6.19.5
What is the PEEP? ___ cm H2O (≤3)
6.19.6
Adjust the O2 flow to 500 ml.
6.19.7
Does the ventilator deliver the full 1200 ml Tidal Volume during 5
consecutive cycles? ___ (Y)
6.19.8
Does the bellows stop adjust smoothly? ___ (Y)
Bellows Drive Gas Leak Test
6.20.1
Remove the ventilator hose from the bellows assembly.
6.20.2
Attach a test terminal to the bellows assembly.
6.20.3
Attach a Capnomed flowmeter test stand to the test terminal.
6.20.4
Set the BPM to 1.
6.20.5
Set the I:E Ratio to 1:1.
6.20.6
Set the flow to the maximum.
6.20.7
What is the volume that is registered during the inspiratory phase?
___(<50 ml)
6.20.8
Remove the test terminal and flowmeter test stand. Connect the
ventilator hose to the VENTILATOR HOSE terminal.
6-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
( )
6.21
6.22
NM3
Bellows PEEP Valve Test (If Applicable)
6.21.1
Adjust the oxygen flow to 5 lpm.
6.21.2
Adjust the PEEP valve clockwise to the maximum position.
6.21.3
What is the PEEP on the absorber pressure gauge? ___ cm H2O (1825)
6.21.4
Adjust the PEEP valve counterclockwise to the minimum position.
6.21.5
Close the O2 flow control valve.
Pressure Limit Control Test (If Applicable)
6.22.1
Set the Inspiratory Flow to the botom of the LOW range.
6.22.2
Set the oxygen flow rate to 4 l/min.
6.22.3
Set the Pressure Limit Control to the MAX position.
6.22.4
Occlude the Y-piece with your thumb.
6.22.5
Slowly increase the Inspiratory Flow setting until a pressure of 80
cm H2O is achieved.
6.22.6
Set the Pressure Limit Control to 30.
6.22.7
What is the peak pressure? ___ cm H2O (27-33)
6.22.8
Set the Pressure Limit Control to the MIN position.
6.22.9
What is the peak pressure? ___ cm H2O (9-15)
6.22.10
Remove your thumb from the Y-piece.
6.22.11
Set the INSPIRATORY FLOW to the maximum of the LOW zone.
6.22.12
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.22.13
Turn the ventilator off.
NOTE:
The INSPIRATORY FLOW gauge will not return to the stop
position when the ventilator is turned off.
6-30
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
6.23
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Trace Functions
6.23.1
Press the TRACE key to bring up a trace display on the data CRT.
6.23.2
Press the Upper Trace Selection key repeatedly and ensure that all
of the available choices are sequentially displayed directly above the
key. Press the ENTER key to set the upper trace display to the
trace selection.
6.23.3
Press the Lower Trace Selection key repeatedly and ensure that all
of the available choices are sequentially displayed directly above the
key. Press the ENTER key to set the lower trace display to the trace
selection.
6.23.4
Press the Sweep Speed Selection key and ensure that the message
displayed above the key toggles between SLOW and FAST. Verify
that the trace sweep speed changes accordingly Fast: 8 Sec.; Slow: 16 Sec.
6.23.5
Press the Waveform Sweep/Freeze key and ensure that the message
displayed above the key toggles between SWEEP and FREEZE.
Verify that the trace display changes accordingly.
6-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.24
NM3
Trend Functions
6.24.1
Press the TREND key to bring up the trend display.
6.24.2
Press the key below the box on the right side of the screen
repeatedly and verify that the screen selection cycles through all
four choices, and finally select SET UP TREND.
6.24.3
Press the ENTER key to bring up the Set Up Trend screen.
6.24.4
Press the key below each column on the screen and ensure that
each cursor moves through all of the choices.
6.24.5
Choose a configuration and press the ENTER key. Verify that the
corresponding trend display appears.
6.24.6
Press the key below the box on the right side of the trend screen,
and select SET UP DATA LOG.
6.24.7
Press the ENTER key to display the Set Up Data screen.
6.24.8
Press the key below each column on the screen and ensure that
each cursor moves through all of the choices.
6.24.9
Select EXIT and press the ENTER key to return to the trend screen.
6.24.10
Press the key below the box on the right side of the trend screen,
and select DISPLAY DATA LOG. Verify that the Tabular Data Log
screen is correctly displayed.
6.24.11
Press the key below EXIT to return to the trend screen.
6-32
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
6.25
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Spiromed Monitor (if applicable)
6.25.1
Press the LO minute volume alarm key.
6.25.2
Verify that the minute volume has a low alarm limit range from 0.5
to 10.0 by increments of 0.5.
6.25.3
Adjust the low minute volume alarm to 2.0 liters.
6.25.4
Press the VOLUME ALARMS DISABLE key to enable the volume
alarms, and start a stopwatch.
6.25.5
What is the time when the "APNEA-VOL" is activated in the
CAUTION column? ___ sec (13-17)
6.25.6
What is the time when the "APNEA-VOL" is activated in the
WARNING column? ___ sec (27-33)
6.25.7
Insert a calibrated volumeter in between the Spiromed sensor and
the exhalation valve.
6.25.8
Attach a patient circuit to the absorber system.
6.25.9
Turn the ventilator ON.
6.25.10
Adjust the FREQUENCY to 6.
6.25.11
Adjust the I:E RATIO to 1:2.
6.25.12
Adjust the flow to the maximum of the LOW zone.
6.25.13
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 lpm.
6.25.14
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 200 ml.
6.25.15
After the first breath is detected, does the "APNEA-VOL" in the
WARNING column and the "MIN VOL LOW" in the CAUTION
column deactivate? ___ (Y)
6.25.16
After one (1) minute, does the "MIN VOL LOW" message appear in
the CAUTION column? ___ (Y)
6.25.17
Adjust the low alarm limit 0.1 liter below the indicated minute
volume.
6-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.25.18
Does the "MIN VOL LOW" in the CAUTION column deactivate? ___
(Y)
6.25.19
Increase the tidal volume to 1000 ml and the frequency to 10 BPM.
6.25.20
Are the tidal volumes on the Spiromed and on the volumeter within
20% of each other? ___ (Y)
6.25.21
Are the minute volumes on the Spiromed and on the volumeter
within 20% of each other? ___ (Y)
6.25.22
Create a reverse flow by loosening the expiratory valve dome.
6.25.23
Each time a reverse flow greater than 20 ml is detected, does the
"REVERSE FLOW" message appear in the ADVISORY column? ___
(Y)
6.25.24
Tighten the expiratory valve dome.
6.25.25
Disconnect the Spiromed sensor from the VOLUME SENSOR
interface.
6.25.26
Do the "VOL SEN DISC" and "VOL ALRM OFF" messages appear
in the ADVISORY column? ___ (Y)
6.25.27
Connect the Spiromed sensor to the VOLUME SENSOR interface.
6.25.28
Turn off the ventilator.
6.25.29
Press the VOLUME ALARMS DISABLE key to disable the volume
alarms.
6-34
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
6.26
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Alarm Circuit Delay Test
6.26.1
Verify the 120-second audio delay at power-up.
6.26.2
Press the alarm silence key.
6.26.3
Does the SILENCE 60 message appear in the Advisory column?
___(Y)
6.26.4
Does the SILENCE message count down to 0 and then disappear?
___(Y)
6.26.5
Press the alarm silence key twice.
6.26.6
Does the SILENCE 120 message appear in the Advisory column?
___(Y)
6.26.7
Press the key labeled with a speaker.
6.26.8
Does the SILENCE message disappear from the Advisory column?
___(Y)
6.26.9
Press the VOLUME ALARMS DISABLE key to disable the volume
alarms.
6-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.27
NM3
BAROMED Monitor Calibration
6.27.1
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
Press the THRESHOLD key (labeled with a pressure waveform).
Adjust the threshold to 8 cm H2O.
Press the HI pressure alarm limit key.
( )
6.27.2
Set the high alarm limit to 65 cm H2O.
6.27.3
Press the APNEA ALARM DISABLE key to enable the alarms.
6.27.4
After the "APNEA-PRES" alarm is displayed in the Warning column
of the alarm CRT, slowly increase the pressure using a pressure
switch tester or test gauge.
At what pressure does the "APNEA-PRES" alarm deactivate? ___ cm
H2O (6-10)
Increase the pressure to 30 cm H2O.
Bleed the pressure and start a stopwatch.
( )
6.27.5
What is the time when the "APNEA-PRES" is activated in the
Caution column? ___ (13-17)
( )
6.27.6
What is the time when the "APNEA-PRES" is activated in the
Warning column? ___ (26-34)
6.27.7
Does the "THRESHOLD LO" message appear in the Advisory
column? ___ (Y)
6.27.8
Adjust the threshold to 26 cm H2O.
6.27.9
Repeat Steps 6.27.5 thru 6.27.7.
6.27.10
Adjust the threshold to 12 cm H2O.
6.27.11
Repeat Steps 6.27.5 thru 6.27.7.
( )
( )
6-36
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
6.28
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Continuing Pressure Alarm
6.28.1
Increase the pressure to 20 cm H2O, maintain the pressure, and
start a stopwatch.
( )
6.28.2
What is the time when the "CONTG PRES" alarm is activated in
the Caution column? ___ sec (12-18)
( )
6.28.3
Decreasing the pressure slowly, what is the pressure at which the
"CONTG PRES" alarm deactivates? ___ cm H2O (10-14)
6.29
( )
6.30
( )
Rev. V
High Pressure Alarm
6.29.1
Slowly increase the pressure.
6.29.2
At what pressure does the "VENT PRES HI" alarm activate? ___ cm
H2O (63-67)
6.29.3
Bleed the pressure.
Sub-Atmospheric Pressure Alarm
6.30.1
Slowly create a sub-atmospheric pressure.
6.30.2
At what pressure does the "SUB ATM PRES" alarm activate? ___
cm H2O (-7 to -12)
6.30.3
Disconnect the test gauge and connect the breathing hose.
6.30.4
Press the APNEA ALARM DISABLE key to disable the apnea
alarms.
6-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.31
NM3
Oxygen Ratio Monitor Control Test
6.31.1
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
6.31.2
Depress the "O2 FLUSH" for 15 seconds.
6.31.3
Turn the N2O flow control valve counter-clockwise to its stop
position.
6.31.4
Slowly increase the oxygen flow until nitrous oxide begins to flow.
6.31.5
What is the oxygen flow rate? ___(200-300 ml/min.)
6.31.6
Slowly increase the oxygen flow until the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO"
LED on the alarm panel is lighted.
6.31.7
What is the nitrous oxide flow rate? ___(150-300 ml/min.)
6.31.8
Set the oxygen flow to 1000 ml/min.
6.31.9
Adjust the nitrous oxide flow until the ORMc controls the nitrous
oxide.
6.31.10
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.31.11
Does the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" LED turn "ON" on the ALARM
PANEL? ___ (Y)
6.31.12
Does the "O2/N2O LOW" message appear in the ADVISORY column?
___ (Y)
6.31.13
Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to the stop position.
6.31.14
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 l/min.
6.31.15
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.31.16
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 l/min.
6.31.17
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.31.18
Adjust the oxygen flow to 3 l/min.
6.31.19
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6-38
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.31.20
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.31.21
Is the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" alarm activated? ___ (N)
6.31.22
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.31.23
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.31.24
What is the flow of nitrous oxide? ___ ml/min. (0)
6.31.25
Is the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" alarm activated? ___ (N)
6.31.26
Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.
6.31.27
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.32
NM3
Scavenger Interface (if applicable)
6.32.1
Check all scavenger hoses and reservoir bag for deterioration.
Replace all worn components.
6.32.2
Negative Relief Valve Cleaning:
6.32.3
6.32.2.1
Remove the plastic valve cover on the front surface of
the scavenger body by turning it in a counter-clockwise
direction.
6.32.2.2
Remove the valve and washer from the scavenger body
by turning it counter-clockwise. A needle-nose pliers
may be used to turn the valve, but use care not to
damage the valve’s fragile disk.
6.32.2.3
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with
a soft brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a
low flow of clean air or oxygen.
6.32.2.4
Reinstall the plastic washer and valve into the
scavenger body. Replace the valve cover.
Negative Relief Safety Valve Cleaning:
6.32.3.1
Unscrew the chrome plated valve housing on the left
side of the scavenger body by turning its fitting
counter-clockwise with a wrench.
6.32.3.2
Unscrew the valve from the housing by turning it in a
counter-clockwise direction.
6.32.3.3
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with
a soft brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a
low flow of clean air or oxygen.
6.32.3.4
Reinstall the valve in the housing, and then reinstall
the housing into the scavenger body. Note: This valve
does not require washers or O-rings.
6-40
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.32.4
6.32.5
Rev. V
Positive Relief Valve Cleaning:
6.32.4.1
Remove the valve housing on the right side of the
scavenger body by turning it counter-clockwise.
6.32.4.2
Inspect the rubber O-ring and replace if worn.
6.32.4.3
Remove the valve from the housing by turning it
counter-clockwise. A needle-nose pliers may be used to
turn the valve, but use care not to damage the valve’s
fragile disk.
6.32.4.4
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with
a soft brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a
low flow of clean air or oxygen.
6.32.4.5
Reinstall the valve and plastic washer into the
housing.
6.32.4.6
Reinstall the valve housing onto the scavenger body,
making sure that the O-ring is properly seated.
Negative Pressure Test:
6.32.5.1
Connect a 22mm breathing hose between the
absorber’s inspiratory and expiratory valves. Set the
Man/Auto valve to the BAG position. Turn the APL
valve fully counter-clockwise. Occlude the bag mount
connector.
6.32.5.2
Verify that the suction waste gas disposal system is
active.
6.32.5.3
Close all flow control valves on the machine. Adjust
the scavenger needle valve to allow typical suction
through the scavenger.
6.32.5.4
Install a scavenger adapter (P/N 4108114) with a hose
barb between the 19mm hose terminal of the scavenger
and the scavenger hose. Connect a test monitor to the
hose barb adapter and observe the pressure reading on
the test gauge. The gauge shall indicate a pressure of
<-1.0 cmH2O.
6-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.32.6
NM3
Positive Pressure Test:
6.32.6.1
Close the scavenger needle valve by turning it fully
clockwise.
6.32.6.2
Push the O2 Flush button to inflate the scavenger
reservoir bag. Open the oxygen flow control valve to 10
l/min.
6.32.6.3
Observe the pressure reading on the test gauge. The
gauge shall indicate a pressure of <10.0 cmH2O.
6.32.6.4
Remove the test equipment. Readjust the scavenger
needle valve to allow typical suction through the
scavenger.
6-42
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
6.33
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Scavenger, A/C (if applicable)
6.33.1
Remove all scavenger hoses one at a time, and drain all
accumulated moisture. Inspect all scavenger hoses for deterioration
and replace any worn hoses.
6.33.2
Remove the safety relief valve housing by unscrewing it in a
counter-clockwise direction.
6.33.3
Inspect the rubber O-ring and replace if worn.
6.33.4
Remove the safety relief valve from its housing by twisting it out in
a counter-clockwise direction. The tips of needle-nose pliers can be
used to turn the valve. Be careful not to damage the valve disk.
6.33.5
Remove any accumulated lint or dust from the valve with a soft
brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow of clean air
or oxygen. The scavenger body can be cleaned with a moist cloth.
6.33.6
Reinstall the valve into the housing, making sure that it is threaded
all the way into the housing and that the plastic washer is properly
seated on its upper surface.
6.33.7
Make sure that the interior of the valve body is completely dry.
Reinstall the valve housing onto the scavenger body, making sure
that the O-ring is properly seated.
6.33.8
Perform the following Pre-Use Checkout procedure:
6.33.8.1
Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between the bottom
of the absorber pole and the right-hand port on the
scavenger. Connect a short 19 mm scavenger hose
between the APL valve and the port on the rear of the
absorber pole. Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose
between the ventilator relief valve and the left-hand
port on the scavenger.
6.33.8.2
Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose from the
inspiratory valve to the expiratory valve on the
absorber.
6.33.8.3
Set the Man/Auto valve to the AUTO position.
6.33.8.4
If the absorber system or ventilator bellows are
equipped with a PEEP valve, turn the PEEP valve
control knob fully counter-clockwise.
6-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.33.8.5
Open the oxygen flow control valve to a flow of 10
l/min. and occlude the 19 mm scavenger terminal
labeled EXHAUST.
6.33.8.6
After the ventilator bellows inflates, the flow of oxygen
will exit the system through the positive pressure
safety relief valve. At this point, the absorber system
breathing pressure gauge shall indicate a pressure of
10.0 cm H2O or less.
6-44
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
6.34
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Open Reservoir Scavenger (if applicable)
6.34.1
Remove all scavenger hoses one at a time and drain all accumulated
moisture. Inspect all scavenger hoses for deterioration and replace
any worn hoses.
6.34.2
Disconnect the hospital vacuum source from the scavenger.
6.34.3
Remove the scavenger flow control needle valve assembly. Inspect
the needle valve and seat for lint or dust accumulation. Clean with
compressed air if necessary, and reinstall the needle valve
assembly.
6.34.4
Remove the scavenger mounting screws.
6.34.5
Remove the two screws securing the access panel at the bottom of
the scavenger canister.
6.34.6
Remove and inspect the silencer; replace if needed.
6.34.7
Remove the reservoir canister from the scavenger body by
unscrewing the four socket head cap screws located at the top of the
canister.
6.34.8
Remove the flowmeter from its housing by turning it counterclockwise. Inspect the tube and clean with compressed air if needed.
6.34.9
Reassemble the scavenger assembly, and reactivate the vacuum
source.
6.34.10
Perform the following negative pressure relief test:
6.34.10.1
Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between the bottom
of the absorber pole and the right-hand port on the
scavenger. Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between
the APL valve and the rear port on the absorber pole.
The left-hand scavenger port may be capped for this
test, or may be connected to the ventilator relief valve.
Connect a DISS vacuum hose to the threaded terminal
on the left side of the scavenger. Alternatively, an
adapter can be used to attach a wall suction hose to
the hose barb fitting on the adapter.
6.34.10.2
Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose from the
inspiratory valve to the expiratory valve on the
absorber. Set the Man/Auto selector valve to the BAG
position. Turn the APL valve control knob fully
counter-clockwise.
6-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.34.11
NM3
6.34.10.3
Verify that the suction waste gas disposal system is
active.
6.34.10.4
Adjust the scavenger needle valve until the flowmeter
indicates between the white lines. Close all flow control
valves on the anesthesia machine. Occlude the
absorber breathing bag terminal.
6.34.10.5
Install a scavenger adapter with a hose barb between
the 19 mm hose terminal of the scavenger, and the
scavenger hose. Connect a test pressure monitor to the
hose barb on the adapter and observe the pressure
reading on the test gauge. The gauge shall indicate a
pressure of 0 to -0.5 cm H2O.
Perform the following positive pressure relief test:
6.34.11.1
Perform Steps 6.30.10.1 thru 6.30.10.3.
6.34.11.2
If the absorber system or ventilator bellows are
equipped with a PEEP valve, turn the PEEP valve
control knob fully counter-clockwise.
6.34.11.3
Turn the scavenger needle valve fully clockwise
(closed).
6.34.11.4
Open the oxygen flow control valve on the anesthesia
machine to a flow of 10 l/min. and occlude the absorber
breathing bag terminal.
6.34.11.5
The flow of oxygen shall now exit the system through
the relief ports around the top of the canister. The test
pressure gauge shall indicate a pressure less than 1.0
cm H2O.
6.34.11.6
After the test, adjust the scavenger needle valve for a
flowmeter indication halfway between the two white
lines.
6-46
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
6.35
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Sphygmomed
6.35.1
Press the START key and verify that the green LED is lighted,and
that the pump begins to inflate the cuff. After the monitor detects
that the cuff is either disconnected, applied wrong, or has a leak,
the pump should stop. The Start LED should extinguish, and the
yellow BP ERROR should be lighted.
6.35.2
The CRT shall display a "BP CUFF ERR" message under the
Advisory column.
6.35.3
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Wrap the cuff loosely
around a cylindrical object. Attach, in series, a calibrated
manometer between the patient cuff and the hose assembly.
6.35.4
Press and hold the
switch to ON.
6.35.5
The cuff shall inflate to 180 to 190 mm Hg in 4 seconds or less. The
manometer shall indicate ±2 mm Hg, and the pressure shall not
drop more than 3 mm Hg before the system deflates. The cuff
should deflate 29 to 31 seconds after the start of inflation. Remove
the cuff from the cylindrical object.
6.35.6
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.35.7
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.35.8
Install the BP cuff on your left arm.
6.35.9
Press the DISPLAY key and set the interval to 5 minutes.
6.35.10
Press the START key.
6.35.11
When the cuff cycle is complete, press the LO key and set the alarm
limit to above the actual value. Decrease the setting to below actual
value; the alarm should cease.
6.35.12
Press the HI key and set the alarm limit to below actual value.
Increase the setting to above actual value; the alarm should cease.
6.35.13
Press the STAT key. The cuff should inflate. The time between
deflation and the next inflation shall be 3 seconds.
6.35.14
Press the STOP key.
and
6-47
keys, and turn the System Power
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.36
( )
NM3
Nellcor O2 SatMed - if applicable
6.36.1
Enable the SaO2 alarms by pressing the SaO2 DISABLE key.
6.36.2
Attach sensor to finger and obtain pulse and SaO2 readings.
6.36.3
Remove sensor from finger. After 10 seconds, the red Pulse Low
LED will be flashing and a continuous audible alarm will be
activated.
6.36.4
The Central Alarm CRT will display "NO OXI PULSE" under the
flashing Warning heading.
6.36.5
Disconnect the sensor from the preamp.
6.36.6
Connect a Nellcor PT 2500 Pocket Tester to the preamp and verify
that SaO2 reading is 81 ±1 and pulse reading is 44 ±1.
6.36.7
Raise the low pulse alarm limit above the actual rate.
6.36.8
The Pulse Low LED will flash red and a continuous audible alarm
will be heard. The Alarm CRT will display "OXI PULSE LOW".
6.36.9
Return the low alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36.10
Decrease the high pulse alarm limit below the actual pulse rate.
6.36.11
The pulse high LED will illuminate and an intermittent audible
alarm will be heard. The Alarm CRT will display "OXI PULSE HI".
6.36.12
Return the pulse high alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36.13
Press the DISPLAY key and verify that SaO2% is displayed.
6.36.14
Press the LO key, and increase the SaO2% low alarm limit above
the actual reading.
6.36.15
The SaO2 LED will flash red, and a continuous audible alarm will
sound. The Alarm CRT will display "OXI SAT LOW" in the Warning
column.
6.36.16
Return the low SaO2 low alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36.17
Press the HI key, and decrease the SaO2 high alarm limit below the
actual reading.
6-48
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NOTE:
The monitor will not display any visual alarms.
6.36.18
An intermittent audible alarm will sound. The Alarm CRT will
display "OXI SAT HIGH".
6.36.19
Return the high SaO2 alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36.20
Remove the Pocket Tester from the preamp, and reconnect the
finger probe.
6.36.21
Disable the SaO2 alarms.
6-49
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.36A Novametrix O2 SatMed - if applicable
6.36A.1
Enable the SaO2 alarms by pressing the SaO2 DISABLE key.
6.36A.2
Attach sensor to finger and obtain pulse and SaO2 readings.
6.36A.3
Remove sensor from finger. After 10 seconds, the red Pulse Low
LED will be flashing and a continuous audible alarm will be
activated.
6.36A.4
The Central Alarm CRT will display "NO OXI PULSE" under the
flashing Warning heading.
6.36A.5
Disconnect the sensor from the extension cable.
6.36A.6
Connect a Novametrix TB500B Sensor Simulator to the SpO2
extension cable. Set the Sensor Type switch to 87XX. Set the output
signal to 3 and the saturation to 82%. Turn the simulator ON and
verify that the monitor’s displayed Pulse reading is 60 ±1 BPM and
the SaO2 reding is 82 ±2.
NOTE:
Do not rely on the simulator’s low battery LED as an indicator of
sufficient battery power. Replace the battery with a fresh 9 volt
transistor battery if proper measured values are not obtained and
the battery measures ≤8.5 VDC.
6.36A.7
Adjust the simulator’s saturation setting to 100 and verify that the
monitor indicates 99 ±1. Adjust the saturation to 62 and verify that
the monitor indicates 62 ±2.
6.36A.8
Depress the Open Test RED key and verify that the PULSE LO
LED activates, a continuous audible alarm is heard, and a NO OXI
PULSE warning alarm is displayed on the CRT. Release the test
key.
6.36A.9
Depress the Open Test INFRARED key and verify that the same
alarm results occur as in the previous test.
6.36A.10 Depress both Open Test keys together and verify the monitors SaO2
and OXI ALARMS DISABLE indicators activate, a single audible
tone is heard, and OXI SEN DISC advisory alarm is displayed on
the CRT. Release the Open Test keys.
6.36A.11 Raise the low pulse alarm limit above the actual rate.
6.36A.12 The Pulse Low LED will flash red and a continuous audible alarm
will be heard. The Alarm CRT will display OXI PULSE LOW.
6-49A
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.36A.13 Return the low alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36A.14 Decrease the high pulse alarm limit below the actual pulse rate.
6.36A.15 The pulse high LED will illuminate and an intermittent audible
alarm will be heard. The Alarm CRT will display "OXI PULSE HI".
6.36A.16 Return the pulse high alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36A.17 Press the DISPLAY key and verify that SaO2% is displayed.
6.36A.18 Press the LO key, and increase the SaO2% low alarm limit above
the actual reading.
6.36A.19 The SaO2 LED will flash red, and a continuous audible alarm will
sound. The Alarm CRT will display "OXI SAT LOW" in the Warning
column.
6.36A.20 Return the low SaO2 low alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36A.21 Press the HI key, and decrease the SaO2 high alarm limit below the
actual reading.
NOTE:
The monitor will not display any visual alarms.
6.36A.22 An intermittent audible alarm will sound. The Alarm CRT will
display "OXI SAT HIGH".
6.36A.23 Return the high SaO2 alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.36A.24 Remove the Pocket Tester from the preamp, and reconnect the
finger probe.
6.36A.25 Disable the SaO2 alarms.
Rev. V
6-49B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.37
( )
NM3
Capnomed CO2 Monitor (if applicable)
6.37.1
Disconnect the scavenger adapter hose from the exhaust port on the
sensor interface panel.
6.37.2
Connect a capnomed flowmeter test stand to the exhaust port.
6.37.3
Verify that the sample flow rate is 150 ±25 ml/min. with all traps
and sample lines attached at the patient interface panel.
6.37.4
Disconnect the sample line and semi-permeable tube from the
auxiliary water trap.
6.37.5
Connect the sample line to the semi-permeable tubing.
6.37.6
Occlude the sample line at the airway adapter and verify that the
LINE BLOCK alarm lamp is lighted, and that "CO2 LINE BLK"
and "CO2 ALRM OFF" messages appear on the CRT in the Advisory
column.
6.37.7
Verify that the test flowmeter reads 0 ml/min.
6.37.8
Remove the occlusion from the sample line.
6.37.9
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.37.10
Press and hold the
and
keys on the monitor, and turn the
System Power switch to ON. Allow 10 minutes for the system to
stabilize.
6.37.11
Press the CAL key on the monitor. The monitor window will show
flashing 00, then steady 00.
6.37.12
Connect a calibration gas adapter (P/N 4110216) to a calibration gas
cylinder (P/N 4107979).
6.37.13
Connect the luer-lock fitting on the calibration gas adapter to the
sample line.
6.37.14
Open the valve on the calibration gas adapter.
6.37.15
Press the DISPLAY key on the monitor; a flashing 38 will appear
in the monitor window.
6.37.16
After 30 seconds, the cal key indicator will be lighted. Press the
CAL key; the 38 display will stop flashing.
6-50
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.37.17
Close the valve on the calibration gas adapter.
6.37.18
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return the
switch to ON. Wait 10 minutes.
6.37.19
Open the valve on the calibration gas adapter. Wait 15 seconds.
6.37.20
Disconnect the luer-lock fitting on the sample line from the
calibration gas adapter. Verify that the monitor indicates 38 ±2 mm
Hg.
6.37.21
Close the valve on the calibration gas adapter.
6.37.22
Disconnect the test flowmeter from the exhaust port and reconnect
the scavenger adapter hose to the exhaust port.
6.37.23
Connect a 3/16 hose barb with a short length of tubing and a male
Luer fitting to the port at the top of the flow meter test stand.
6.37.24
Remove the sample line and connect the Luer fitting on the flow
meter to the plastic Luer fitting on the auxiliary water reservoir.
6.37.25
Occlude the male Luer connector on the auxiliary water trap
bracket.
6.37.26
Verify a flow of 35 - 60 ml/min. with a vacuum supply of 375 mm
Hg.
6.37.27
Disconnect the test flowmeter. Reconnect the sample line to the
auxiliary water trap reservoir.
6.37.28
Reconnect the semi-permeable tube to the auxiliary water trap
bracket.
6.37.29
Connect the sample line to the luer-lock fitting on the calibration
gas adapter.
6.37.30
Open the valve on the calibration gas adapter a small amount. Wait
for the displayed CO2 waveform to stabilize.
6.37.31
Disconnect the sample line from the calibration gas adapter.
6.37.32
Verify an ETCO2 value of 38 ±2 mm Hg on the monitor display.
6.37.33
Press the HI key, and set the alarm default value to 35 mm Hg.
6.37.34
Enable the CO2 alarm.
6-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.37.35
Repeat Steps 29 thru 31.
6.37.36
The red CO2 HI lamp will light continuously; an "ET CO2 HIGH"
message will appear on the CRT in the Caution column, and an
intermittent audible alarm will sound.
6.37.37
Return the high alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.37.38
Press the LO key, and set the low alarm limit to 41.
6.37.39
Repeat Steps 29 thru 31.
6.37.40
The red CO2 LOW lamp will light continuously, and an "ET CO2
LOW" message will appear on the CRT in the Caution column.
6.37.41
Return the low alarm limit to its original default setting.
6.37.42
Repeat Steps 29 thru 31.
6.37.43
When an ETCO2 value is displayed, start a stop watch.
6.37.44
After 15 seconds, the red APNEA indicator will light continuously;
an "APNEA - CO2" message will appear on the CRT in the Caution
column, and an intermittent audible alarm will sound.
6.37.45
After another 15 seconds, the red APNEA indicator will flash, the
"APNEA - CO2" message will move to the Warning column, and the
audible alarm will sound continuously.
6.37.46
Disable the CO2 alarms.
6-52
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
6.38
*
*
*
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Vapor Exclusion System (and Indicator Lamps if applicable)
6.38.1
Set all vapors to zero (0).
6.38.2
Adjust the handwheel on the left position vapor to any
concentration above zero (0).
6.38.3
Verify that the yellow indicator lamp above the left position
vaporizer is illuminated. Press AGENT SELECT on the multispec
monitor and verify the correct blinking agent initial in the monitor
window.
6.38.4
Is it possible to adjust the middle position vapor? ___ (N)
6.38.5
Is it possible to adjust the right position vapor? ___ (N)
6.38.6
Adjust the handwheel on the left position vapor to zero (0).
6.38.7
Adjust the handwheel on the middle position vapor to any
concentration above zero (0).
6.38.8
Verify that the yellow indicator lamp above the center vaporizer is
illuminated. Press AGENT SELECT on the multispec monitor and
verify the correct blinking agent initial in the monitor window.
6.38.9
Is it possible to adjust the left position vapor? ___ (N)
6.38.10
Is it possible to adjust the right position vapor? ___ (N).
6.38.11
Adjust the handwheel on the middle position vapor to zero (0).
6.38.12
Adjust the handwheel on the right position to any concentration
above zero (0).
6.38.13
Verify that the yellow indicator lamp above the right position
vaporizer is illuminated. Press AGENT SELECT on the multispec
monitor and verify the correct blinking agent initial in the monitor
window.
6.38.14
Is it possible to adjust the left position vapor? ___ (N).
6.38.15
Is it possible to adjust the middle position vapor? ___ (N).
6.38.16
Adjust the handwheel on the right position vapor to zero (0).
* Denotes Agent Order Indicators test.
Rev. V
6-53
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.39
Multispec (if applicable)
6.39.1
Intentionally left blank
NOTE:
Before performing the accuracy test, the Multispec must be in the
full accuracy mode. The CO2 and Agent warm-up messages shall not
appear on the advisory display.
NOTE:
Before performing the accuracy test, the oxygen analyzer must
display 21% FIO2. The sensor must be exposed to ambient air
during the entire Multispec accuracy testing.
6.39.2
Sample Flow Test
( )
( )
NM3
6.39.3
6.39.2.1
Verify that the neonatal mode is disabled.
6.39.2.2
Verify that an oxygen supply is connected to the
machine.
6.39.2.3
Examine the sample circuit consisting of the airway
adapter/filter, sample line, and auxiliary water trap.
Replace any components as needed.
6.39.2.4
Connect a capnomed flowmeter test stand to the
patient sample exhaust port.
6.39.2.5
Verify that the sample flow is within 175 to 225
ml/min.
Line Block Test
6.39.3.1
Remove the calibration gas cylinder from the multispec
calibration adapter.
6.39.3.2
Set both flow control valves on the multispec
calibration adapter fully counter-clockwise.
6.39.3.3
Attach the patient sample line to the luer lock fitting
on the calibration adapter.
6-54
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
( )
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.39.4
6.39.3.4
Turn the flow control valve clockwise until the
capnomed flowmeter indicates 75 ml/min.
6.39.3.5
Verify that the letters LL appear in the monitor
display window after approximately 15 seconds.
Auxiliary Water Trap Test Procedure (if applicable)
6.39.4.1
Disconnect the test flowmeter from the exhaust port
and reconnect the scavenger adapter hose to the
exhaust port.
6.39.4.2
Connect a 3/16 in. hose barb with a short length of
tubing and a male Luer fitting to the port at the top of
the flow meter test stand.
6.39.4.3
Remove the patient sample line and connect the Luer
fitting of the test stand to the plastic Luer fitting on
the auxiliary reservoir.
6.39.4.4
Occlude the male Luer connector of the auxiliary water
trap bracket
6.39.4.5
Verify a flow of 35 to 60 ml/min. with a scavenger
system supply vacuum of 375 Hg.
6.39.4.6
Disconnect the test flowmeter. Reconnect the sample
line to the reservoir.
6.39.4.7
Reconnect the semi-permeable tube to the auxiliary
water trap bracket.
NOTE:
Before performing the Multispec accuracy test, the vaporizers must
be exposed to a constant temperature (preferably 22° C) for at least
one hour. The Multispec analyzer must be in the full accuracy mode.
6.39.5
Accuracy Test
6.39.5.1
Verify that CO2 and AGT Warmup messages are not on
the CRT advisory screen.
6.39.5.2
Press the "CO2/AGENT CAL" key on the monitor
PANEL. Verify that CO2 CAL appears on the CRT and
that CAL key illuminates.
6.39.5.3
Press the "SELECT" key and configure the monitor
display to indicate "H".
6-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM3
6.39.5.4
Attach the CO2 calibration adapter assembly (P/N
4110216 A) to the CO2 calibration cylinder (P/N
4107979 P)
6.39.5.5
Turn the flow control valve on the calibration adapter
slightly counter-clockwise.
6.39.5.6
After the CO2 waveform peaks on the remote display,
turn off the flow and remove the sample line from the
calibration adapter.
6.39.5.7
Verify that the ET CO2 display indicates within 36.0
to 40.0 mm Hg.
6.39.5.8
Press the monitor Display key to scroll to ET AGENT.
6.39.5.9
Verify that the "ET" halothane on the agent display
indicates within 0 to 0.4%
6.39.5.10
Verify that the "EXP" N2O indicates within 32.0 to
38.0% on the data CRT.
6.39.5.11
Press the TRACE keypad. Using the arrow keys below
the Trace CRT, select the HALOTHANE scale.
6.39.5.12
Ensure that all vaporizer handwheels are set to the
zero, or OFF position.
6.39.5.13
Fill each vaporizer with the correct anesthetic agent
until the liquid level is within the correct range as
indicated on the sight glass. DO NOT OVER FILL.
6.39.5.14
Calibrate a Riken gas indicator Model 18 as per
manufacturer’s instructions.
6.39.5.15
Insert the patient circuit elbow into the fresh gas
outlet.
6.39.5.16
Connect a sampling "T" between the elbow and the
fresh gas hose.
6.39.5.17
Turn the APL valve knob fully counter-clockwise to its
open position.
6.39.5.18
Attach a short 22 mm hose between the inspiratory
and expiratory valves.
6.39.5.19
Attach a breathing bag to swivel bag mount connector.
6-56
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
( )
( )
( )
( )
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.39.5.20
Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min. to flush the system of
residual gases.
6.39.5.21
Reduce the oxygen flow to 4.0 l/min.
6.39.5.22
Slowly adjust the left mounted vaporizer (if fitted) to
1.0% volume concentration, and wait five minutes for
the vaporizer to stabilize.
6.39.5.23
If applicable, apply the conversion factor to the current
value shown on the Riken gas analyzer. Record the
reading obtained , the value observed on the multigas
analyzer, and the S/N of the vaporizer.
6.39.5.24
Verify that the displayed "Agent %" value is within the
sum of the tolerances of the vaporizer and the Riken
gas indicator.
6.39.5.25
Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 2.5% volume
concentration, and wait five minutes for the vaporizer
to stabilize.
6.39.5.26
Repeat Steps 6.39.5.23 and 6.39.5.24.
6.39.5.27
Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 4.0% volume
concentration, and wait five minutes for the vaporizer
to stabilize.
6.39.5.28
Repeat Steps 6.39.5.23 and 6.39.5.24.
6.39.5.29
Turn the vaporizer OFF.
6.39.5.30
Repeat Steps 6.39.5.20 thru 6.39.5.29 for the other two
vaporizers if applicable. When comparing displayed
values with the Riken gas analyzer readings, apply the
conversion factors if applicable to the readings
obtained with the Riken gas analyzer.
NOTE:
If any reading is outside of the Multispec tolerance
limits, the Multispec analyzer must be recalibrated in
accordance with the procedure given in Section 5, and
then Procedure 6.39 must be repeated.
6-57
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.40
6.41
NM3
Accessory Attachments and Visual Inspection
6.40.1
Attach each accessory item to its intended location. Reject any item
that cannot be properly attached.
6.40.2
Inspect all surfaces of the instrument. Replace labels, disposable
items and damaged parts as necessary.
Battery Circuit Test
6.41.1
Is the green "ON" LED lighted? __ (Y)
6.41.2
With the system power switch ON, unplug the AC power cord.
6.41.3
Press and hold the BATTERY TEST button.
6.41.4
Is the green "BATTERY TEST" LED lighted as long as the
BATTERY TEST button is depressed? __ (Y)
6.41.5
Release the BATTERY TEST button.
6.41.6
Is the yellow "AC PWR FAIL" LED lighted as long as the power
cord is unplugged? __ (Y)
6.41.7
Does the "AC PWR FAIL" message appear in the ADVISORY
column? __ (Y)
6.41.8
Inspect the power cord and strain relief for damage: bent prongs,
frayed ends, etc.
6.41.9
Plug the AC power cord back in. Verify that the "AC PWR FAIL"
message disappears from the Advisory column of the alarms CRT.
6-58
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
6.42
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Ground Continuity Test
6.42.1
Remove the monitor housing top shelf.
6.42.2
Unplug the machine AC power cord from the outlet and plug it into
a safety analyzer. Plug the safety analyzer into a wall outlet.
NOTE:
Do not plug the safety analyzer into a line isolation monitor as
inaccurate readings may occur.
6.42.3
Set the safety analyzer function switch to the GROUND WIRE
RESISTANCE position. Attach the test lead to the SINGLE LEAD
connector.
6.42.4
Set the safety analyzer GROUND switch to the NORMAL position.
Set the POLARITY switch to the OFF position.
6.42.5
The safety analyzer shall indicate 0.1 ohms or less with its test lead
applied to the following points:
-
Rev. V
Cylinder yoke
Monitor housing chassis
6-59
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.43
( )
NM3
Chassis Leakage Current Test
6.43.1
Connect the AC power cord to a safety analyzer and turn the
System Power switch to ON.
NOTE:
Do not plug the safety analyzer into a line isolation monitor as
inaccurate readings may occur.
6.43.2
Set the safety analyzer to the CHASSIS LEAKAGE CURRENT
position.
6.43.3
Attach the safety analyzer test lead to a yoke assembly.
6.43.4
Record the total leakage current with the polarity and ground
switches set to the following positions:
NOTE:
Cycle machine power
to STANDBY
before changing
switch position.
6.44
( )
Ground
Open
Normal
Open
Normal
Polarity
Normal
Normal
Reversed
Reversed
6.43.5
Verify that the leakage current is 75 microamps or less in each of
the positions (110 microamps or less for 220/240 volt power supply
option).
NOTE:
All accessory devices must be unplugged from convenience
receptacles to determine the leakage current of the NARKOMED 3.
NOTE:
The total leakage current of the work station (NARKOMED 3 and
all devices plugged into the NARKOMED 3 shall not exceed 100
microamps.
Service Data
6.44.1
Access the Service Selection Screen by pressing and holding the
CHECKOUT key and the LOG DATA key, and press the hidden key
directly to the right of the LOG DATA key.
6.44.2
Select "SERVICE DATA" and press ENTER.
6.44.3
Record the Last Service Date, Hours Since Serviced, Total Hours,
and firmware version numbers for the following:
CO2/Agt
O2Med
Spiromed
Baromed
ECC
O2 SatMed
6-60
Sphygmomed
CCC
Alarms CRT
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
6.45
( )
( )
Rev. V
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Oxygen Flush Test
6.45.1
Turn the SYSTEM POWER switch to STANDBY.
6.45.2
Press and release the O2FLUSH button.
6.45.3
Does the flow of oxygen stop immediately? __ (Y)
6.45.4
Using a 15 mm male connector and short piece of tubing, connect a
test minute volumeter to the common gas outlet.
6.45.5
Press the O2FLUSH button.
6.45.6
What is the oxygen flush flow rate? ___ lpm. (45-65)
6.45.7
Remove the test minute volumeter.
6.45.8
Turn the SYSTEM POWER switch to ON.
6.45.9
Insert the sensor from a calibrated O2Med into the inspiratory valve
dome.
6.45.10
Press the O2FLUSH button.
6.45.11
What is the O2 concentration? ___ % O2 (97-100)
6.45.12
Remove and cap the O2Med sensor; plug the inspiratory valve dome
adapter.
6.45.13
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.45.14
Bleed the oxygen circuit by pressing the O2FLUSH button.
6-61
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
( )
6.46
NM3
Operator’s Manual
Verify the availability/location of the NARKOMED 3 Operator’s Manual.
( )
6.47
Final Check
6.47.1
Verify that the pipeline hoses are connected to the hospital pipeline.
6.47.2
Verify that the APL valve
counterclockwise, fully open.
6.47.3
Verify that the O2Med sensor is removed from the valve dome
adapter.
6.47.4
Verify that the valve dome is plugged.
6.47.5
Verify that the machine is plugged into a live outlet.
6.47.6
Verify that the Manual/Automatic selector valve is in the MANUAL
position.
6-62
knob
is
turned
completely
Rev. V
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
7.0
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
Software updates to the NARKOMED 3 are supplied as firmware in the form of replaceable
EPROMs for the Monitors, CCC assembly, Trend assembly, ECC module, and CRT
assemblies. The figures that accompany the procedures in this section show the location of
the firmware chip on each assembly and its orientation.
7-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.1
NM3
Monitors Firmware Replacement (Typical)
The firmware chip in each monitor is located on the top circuit board and is
designated U3. See Figure 7-1. Access to the chip requires removal of the
monitor from the machine, and removal of the monitor top cover.
Parts Required:
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
7.1.1
-
O2MED (B)
BAROMED (B)
SPIROMED (B)
SPHYGMOMED (B)
SAO2 (B)
MULTISPEC
Ver
Ver
Ver
Ver
Ver
Ver
x.xx
x.xx
x.xx
x.xx
x.xx
x.xx
4108865
4108997
4109856
4109032
4108955
4110254
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.1.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.1.3
Remove the monitor as outlined in Section 4.
7.1.4
Remove the four screws holding the top cover on the monitor, and
remove the cover.
7.1.5
Carefully remove the firmware chip from the circuit board.
7.1.6
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration with its notch toward the
front of the monitor.
7.1.7
Reinstall the monitor cover, and reinstall the monitor in the machine.
7.1.8
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.1.9
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.1.10 Access the Service Data Screen (Ref. Section 2.3) and observe the
software version number that appears on the screen. Verify that it
matches the label on the replacement firmware chip.
7.1.11 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.1.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-2
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
FIRMWARE CHIP
COVER
COVER
SCREWS (4X)
U3
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR (TYPICAL)
FRONT
SV30071
Figure 7-1: FIRMWARE LOCATION - NM3 MONITORS
7-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.2
NM3
CCC Assembly Firmware Replacement
The firmware chip on the CCC assembly is located on the main circuit board
assembly and is designated U3. See Figure 7-2. Access to the chip requires
removal of the CCC assembly from the machine, and removal of the cover plate
from the assembly.
Parts Required:
7.2.1
Firmware - CCC
Ver x.xx 4108808
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.2.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.2.3
Remove the CCC assembly from the monitor housing as outlined in
Section 4.
7.2.4
Remove the three screws holding the cover plate to the assembly, and
remove the cover plate.
7.2.5
Carefully remove the firmware chip from the circuit board.
7.2.6
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration with its notch toward the
front of the assembly.
7.2.7
Reinstall the cover plate on the assembly, and reinstall the CCC
assembly in the machine.
7.2.8
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.2.9
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.2.10 Access the Service Data Screen (Ref. Section 2.3) and observe the
software version number that appears on the screen. Verify that it
matches the label on the replacement firmware chip.
7.2.11 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.2.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-4
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
FRONT
COVER SCREWS (3X)
SIDE VIEW OF
CCC ASSEMBLY
COVER
U3
MAIN CIRCUIT BOARD
FIRMWARE CHIP
SV30072
Figure 7-2: FIRMWARE LOCATION - CCC ASSEMBLY
7-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.3
NM3
Trend Assembly Firmware Replacement
The firmware chip on the Trend assembly is located on the CRT Controller
circuit board and is designated U20. See Figure 7-3. Access to the chip requires
removal of the Trend assembly from the machine.
Parts Required:
7.3.1
Trend Mon CRT
Ver x.xx 4108436
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.3.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.3.3
Remove the Trend assembly from the monitor housing as outlined in
Section 4.
7.3.4
Carefully remove the firmware chip from the circuit board.
7.3.5
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration with its notch toward the
front of the assembly.
7.3.6
Reinstall the Trend assembly in the monitor housing.
7.3.7
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.3.8
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.3.9
Verify that all CRT functions are working correctly.
7.3.10 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.3.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-6
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
FIRMWARE CHIP
U20
FRONT
SIDE VIEW OF
TREND ASSEMBLY
CRT CONTROLLER PCB
SV30073
Figure 7-3: FIRMWARE LOCATION - TREND ASSEMBLY
7-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.4
NM3
ECC (Serial Interface) Module Firmware Replacement
The firmware chip in the ECC module is located on the lower circuit board and
is designated U2. See Figure 7-3. Access to the chip requires removal of the
ECC module from the monitor housing, and removal of the module cover plate.
Parts Required:
7.4.1
Firmware - Serial IF
Ver x.xx 4109620
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.4.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.4.3
Disconnect any cables connected to the serial interface ports on the
back of the machine. Open the back cover of the monitor housing and
remove the ECC module as outlined in Section 4.
7.4.4
Remove the four screws holding the cover plate to the module, and
remove the cover plate.
7.4.5
Carefully remove the firmware chip from the circuit board.
7.4.6
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration.
7.4.7
Reinstall the cover plate, and reinstall the ECC module in the back
cover of the monitor housing.
7.4.8
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.4.9
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.4.10 Access the Service Data Screen (Ref. Section 2.3) and observe the
software version number that appears on the screen. Verify that it
matches the label on the replacement firmware chip.
7.4.11 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.4.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
COVER
FIRMWARE CHIP
LOWER
CIRCUIT
BOARD
COVER
SCREWS (4X)
SV30074
Figure 7-4: FIRMWARE LOCATION - ECC MODULE
7-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.5
NM3
CRT Assembly (Typical) Firmware Replacement
The firmware chip in each CRT assembly is located on the CRT Controller
circuit board and is designated U20. See Figure 7-5. Access to the chip requires
removal of the CRT assembly from the monitor housing.
Parts Required:
7.5.1
Firmware - Alarms
Firmware - NM3 CRT
Ver x.xx 4109323 (Alarm CRT)
Ver x.xx 4109324 (Data CRT)
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.5.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.5.3
Remove the CRT assembly from the monitor housing as outlined in
Section 4.
7.5.4
Carefully remove the firmware chip from the circuit board.
7.5.5
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration with its notch toward the
front of the CRT assembly.
7.5.6
Reinstall the CRT assembly in the monitor housing.
7.5.7
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.5.8
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.5.9
Verify that all CRT functions are working correctly. For the Alarm CRT,
access the Service Data Screen (Ref. Section 2.3) and observe the
software version number that appears on the screen. Verify that it
matches the label on the replacement firmware chip.
7.5.10 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.5.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-10
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
CRT
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT BOARD
SIDE VIEW OF
CRT ASSEMBLY
FIRMWARE
CHIP
SV30075
Figure 7-5: FIRMWARE LOCATION - CRT ASSEMBLIES
7-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6
NM3
Gas Analyzer Interface PCB (Andros 4610) Firmware Replacement
The firmware chip for the Andros 4610 is located on the GAI board on the
analyzer PCB assembly. See Figure 7-6. Access to this assembly requires
opening the back cover of the monitor housing.
Parts Required:
7.6.1
Firmware
Ver x.xx 4112595-001
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power from
the machine.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when servicing any of the assemblies
inside the monitor housing.
7.6.2
Disable the three circuit breakers on the primary power supply by
pulling out each button with a knife or sharp object.
7.6.3
Disconnect any cables connected to the serial interface ports on the
back of the machine, and open the back cover of the monitor housing.
7.6.4
Locate the firmware chip on the GAI board and carefully remove the
chip.
7.6.5
Insert the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure that the
chip is oriented as shown in the illustration.
7.6.6
Close the back cover of the monitor housing and re-attach any interface
cables that were previously removed.
7.6.7
Reset the circuit breakers on the primary power supply.
7.6.8
Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power Switch to
ON.
7.6.9
Perform the Multispec Flow Rate adjustment given in Section 5.
7.6.10 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
7.6.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
7-12
Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
FIRMWARE CHIP
J14
J8
J1
U3
REAR VIEW OF
ANALYZER PCB
ASSEMBLY
J16
J18
J15
J7
J13
GAI BOARD
Figure 7-6: FIRMWARE LOCATION - ANDROS 4610 GAI BOARD
Rev. B
7-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS
8.0 Spare and Replacement Parts
Part numbers for field-replaceable items on the NARKOMED 3 anesthesia system are listed
on the following pages, along with part numbers for related hardware and cables.
The item numbers are keyed to the accompanying illustrations to aid in identifying the item
and its location.
ASSEMBLY/PART
PAGE
Monitor Chassis, Monitors, CCC, Trend/MUX, CRT Assemblies . .
Front Bezel Assembly, Serial Interface Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, incl. PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Sphygmomed Module, Pulse Oximeter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Inlet, Failsafe, Alarm Channel Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . .
ORMC, Vaporizer Select Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tubes, Gauges, Flow Control Valves, Alarm Channel Items
Yoke, Regulator, Flush Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Panels, Power Supply Assemblies, Casters . . . . . . . . . .
Absorber Assembly, Breathing Pressure Hoses, Oxygen Sensor . .
Man/Auto Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Man/Auto Selector Valve (Later Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reservoir Scavenger, old style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/C Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. K
8-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 8-2, 8-3
. 8-4, 8-5
. 8-6, 8-7
. 8-8, 8-9
8-10, 8-11
8-12, 8-13
8-14, 8-15
8-16, 8-17
8-18, 8-19
8-20, 8-21
8-22, 8-23
8-24, 8-25
8-26, 8-27
8-28, 8-29
8-30, 8-31
8-32, 8-33
8-34, 8-35
8-36, 8-37
8-38, 8-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
8
9
6
7
NM3
20
1
19
14
5
15
22
5
18
12
21
13
4
10
16
SV30923
8-2
11
17
3
2
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
1
2
CRT/Monitor Housing, Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109055
Screw, Top Shelf (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW04006
3
CCC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108769
Firmware - CCC Ver x.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108808
4
Trend Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108667
Firmware - Trend Mon CRT Ver x.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108436
5
6
7
8
9
CRT Assembly (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, CRT Mounting (2x each CRT) . . . . .
Washer, CRT Mounting (2x each CRT) . . . .
Screw, CRT Ground Wire (1x each CRT) . . .
Washer, CRT Ground Wire (1x each CRT) .
Firmware - Alarms Ver x.xx (Alarm CRT) .
Firmware - NM3 CRT Ver x.xx (Data CRT)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4107738
HW09008
HW66002
HW02009
HW68000
. 4109323
. 4109324
10
Monitor, O2MED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - O2MED (B) Ver x.xx . . . . . . .
Monitor, BAROMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - BAROMED (B) Ver x.xx . . . .
Monitor, SPIROMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - SPIROMED (B) Ver x.xx . . .
Monitor, SPHYGMOMED . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - SPHYGMOMED (B) Ver x.xx
Monitor, Pulse Oximeter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - SaO2 (B) Ver x.xx . . . . . . . . .
Monitor, Multispec* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware - Multispec Ver x.xx . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
12
13
14
15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4109348
4108865
4109349
4108997
4109350
4108956
4109174
4109032
4109173
4108955
4110035
4110254
16
Monitor Bezel (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109047
17
18
19
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
20
21
22
CCC J3 to Trend/Crt Controller J1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC J4 to Data CRT J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC J5 to Alarm CRT J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC J2 to Backplane B J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC J3 to Backplane A J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend/MUX J5 to Data CRT J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend/MUX J3 to Data CRT J7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend/MUX J7 to Data CRT Lower PCB P2 . . . . . .
Trend/MUX J8 to Data CRT J2 and Alarm CRT J2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4109253
4109254
4109255
4109265
4109264
4109258
4109294
4109257
4109269
*For installations with a 4610 upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112924-001
Rev. B
8-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
REAR
VIEW
30
31
FRONT
VIEW
DATA
BARGRAPH
TREND
23
TRACE
CHECKOUT
CONFIGURE
LOG DATA
ENTER
24
25
26
DATA
BARGRAPH
TREND
TRACE
27
CHECKOUT
CONFIGURE
28
29
33
34
32
NARKOMED 3 SIDE VIEW
OF MONITOR HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER OPEN
SV30910
35
8-4
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Front Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Panel and Bezel Assembly .
Alarm CRT Keypad . . . . . . . . . . .
Data CRT Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Panel and Switch Assembly
Filter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Control Keypad . . . . . . .
Keypad Retainer Plate . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Retainer Plate (4x) . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109279
. 4109397
. 4108173
. 4108174
. 4108864
. 4108650
. 4108523
. 4109061
HW09012
Serial Interface Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Cable, Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Interface Sub-Assembly (ECC Module)
Screw, ECC Module Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . .
Firmware - Serial IF Ver x.xx . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4108818
. 4109646
. 4109623
HW09000
. 4109620
8-5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
FRONT (INSIDE) VIEW OF ANALYZER PCB ASSEMBLY
SV30086
49
J5
J4
J1
48
J2
J3
J9
38
37
45
39
40
42 43 44
46
41
REAR VIEW OF ANALYZER
AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
WITH HINGED COVER OPEN
47
8-6
36
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Multispec Analyzer Assembly* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Pump Assembly Mounting (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Fan Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Washer, Fan Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, Fan Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrubber Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Analyzer Cover (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable, Pump Controller J1 to PCB Assembly Servo/Driver J2
Cable, PCB Assembly J1 to Multispec Monitor J1 . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4110442
. 4110019
. 4109993
. 4110894
HW01001
. 4109970
HW09025
HW68001
HW50004
. S010000
. 4110322
HW09000
. 4110037
. 4109975
*For installations with a 4610 upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112593-001
Rev. B
8-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
5 2
5 1
5 0
X X XX X X .
XXX
5 5
J1
J2
5 3
5 4
5 3 B
5 3 A
5 6
S V 3 0 0 5 0
8-8
Rev. N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
50
51
52
Sphygmomed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109797
Screw, Sphygmomed Module Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09008
Cable, Sphygmomed Module J3 to Sphygmomed Monitor J1 . . . . . . . . . . . 4109038
53
Pulse Oximeter Module, Nellcor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108860
Service Exchange part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4109134
Pulse Oximeter Module, Novametrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114972
53A
53B
Screw, Pulse Oximeter bracket (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW03022
Bracket, Pulse Oximeter Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109133
54
55
Screw, Pulse Oximeter Module Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01012
Cable, Pulse Oximeter Module J1 to SaO2 Monitor J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109131
56
Screw, Ventilator Box Front Panel (6x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09000
Rev. P
8-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
61
62
61
63
66
60
59
58
NM3
57
71
70
XXX
XXX.
XXX
64
65
67
68
69
72
81
80
79
74
78
73
75
76
77
SV20017
8-10
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Ventilator Solenoid Mounting (2x) . . . . . . .
AC Power Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer, AC Power Filter Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . .
AC Receptacle (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Filter Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, AC Power Filter Cover (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Harness, AVE Switch and Solenoid . . . . . . .
Wire Harness, Alarm Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Gauge Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Part Number (Gauge Only)
Inspiratory Flow Regulator Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Assembly, Vapor Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Assembly, Ventilator Box to Monitor Box . .
Cable Assembly, Ventilator Box to Alarm Channel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4108918
. . HW02011
. . . 4107759
4110589-007
. . . 4106086
. . . 4109622
. . HW09016
. . . 4110906
. . . 4109771
. . . 4109236
. . . 4108948
. . . 4108856
. . . 4111989
. . . 4108846
. . . 4111553
. . . 4109267
. . . 4109072
72
73
74
75
Nut, Knob Assembly Mounting . .
Knob Assembly, Incl. Knob, Bezel
Setscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........
and Shaft
........
........
........
Coupling
........
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4107460
. 4107556
HW04007
. 4103396
76
77
78
79
80
81
Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Bezel Retainer (2x)
Switch Assembly . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109767
. 4107453
HW04007
. 4103394
HW03038
. 4109768
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
82
88
83
84
87
86
85
SV30907
8-12
89
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
82
83
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110775
Screw, Valve & Guide Assembly Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09013
Bellows Valve Case Assembly (Early Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4108859
Screw, Valve Case Assembly Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01016
84
Bellows Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106948
85
86
Bellows Assembly, Adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bellows Sub-assembly, Adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Urethane (Non-Latex) Bellows Sub-assembly, Adult
Relief Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diaphragm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
88
89
Rev. G
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4106935
. . . 4106930
4106930-001
. . . 4108050
. . . 4110960
Ventilator Box Front Panel, Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111420
Ventilator Box Front Panel, Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111421
8-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
90
93
97
94
95
96
91
91
A
92
91
B
CSA
90
98
93
97
94
95
96
91
92
SV45020
8-14
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
90
Vaporizer Mounting Screw, 4 x 30 Metric (2x Per Vaporizer) . . . . . . . . . HW01072
Vaporizer Gasket, O-Ring (2x Per Vaporizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2121929
91
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, O2 . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, O2 (Canada) .
Connector, N.I.S.T., O2 Male (Export) .
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, N2O . . . . . . .
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, N2O (Canada)
Connector, N.I.S.T., N2O Male (Export)
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, Air . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, Air (Canada)
Connector, N.I.S.T., Air Male (Export)
Filter, Pipeline Inlet (Typ., All Inlets) .
91A
92
92A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4109345
4109297
4110388
4109344
4109298
4111382
4109412
4109861
4110386
4106198
93
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106037
94
Oxygen Supply Failure Protection Device, N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108686
Oxygen Supply Failure Protection Device, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108687
95
Alarm Channel Assembly (Early models) . . . . . . . . . . .
(Later models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Switch Valve & Fitting Assembly (Early models)
Alarm Circuit Board Assembly (Early models) . . . . . .
(Later models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Circuit Board Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
97
98
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4108592
. 4111522
. 4109285
. 4108567
. 4111777
HW02011
Oxygen Supply Low Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109946
Reservoir Assembly, Alarm Whistle (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109947
8-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
102
101
100
SV30062
99
8-16
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
99
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller Assembly (Early models) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109271
(Later models without electrical conections) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111765
100
101
102
Vaporizer Select Switch (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103341
Wiring Harness,Vaporizer Select Switch (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110233
Circuit Board, Vapor Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110219
8-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
107
A
107
103
System Power
106
104
117
118
105
108
107
A
109
110
119
120
N2 O
111
O2
PIPELINE
PIPELINE
121
112
During Operation
112
CYLINDER
N2O
CYLINDER
O2
113
113
115
116
8-18
114
SV40010
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
103
104
105
106
107
107A
108
109
110
111
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Flowmeter Light Circuit Assembly (2x)
Flow Tube, O2, 1-10 L/min . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, O2, 100-1000 mL/min . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 1-10 L/min . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 100-1000 mL/min . . . .
Flow Tube, Air, 1-10 L/min . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, Air, 100-1000 mL/min . . . .
Gasket, Flow Tube (2x per Tube) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Label, N2O Flow Control Knob, Blue (USA, UK, Canada) .
Gray (Germany) . . . . . . . .
Knob, Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2 Flow Control Knob, Green (USA) . . . . . . . . . . .
White (UK, Canada) . . . . .
Blue (Germany) . . . . . . . .
Knob, O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Air Flow Control Knob, Yellow (USA, Germany) . .
Black/White (UK, Canada)
Label, CO2 Flow Control Knob, Gray (USA,UK, Canada) .
Black (Germany) . . . . . . . .
Label, O2-He Flow Control Knob, Green/Brown (USA) . . .
White/Brown (Canada) . . .
Valve Cartridge, Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103904
4111266-004
. . . 4103736
. . . 4103178
. . . 4105981
4111266-002
. . . 4103156
. . . 4103905
. . . 4105982
. . . 4103908
4111266-006
. . . 4110951
. . . 4110952
. . . 4103352
. . . 4115871
112
Gauge, 100 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
Gauge, 3000 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The following gauge part numbers apply to earlier
Gauge, 100 psi O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 4000 psi O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 100 psi N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gaugem 2000 psi N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......
.......
machine
.......
.......
.......
.......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
............
............
configurations:
............
............
............
............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4107370
4103418
4103417
4103420
4103419
4106693
4106692
4102724
. . . . . . . . 4110575-001
. . . . . . . . 4110575-002
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4103076
4103074
4103100
4103075
114
115
Screw, Knob Guard Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09017
Knob Guard, 2-Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110621
Knob Guard, 3-Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110574
116
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
117
118
119
120
121
*Housing, Push Button
*Cap, Push Button . . . .
*Label, Dot . . . . . . . . .
*Knob, Main Switch . . .
*Housing, Main Switch
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
2
3
2
3
4
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
...........
(Air) . . . . . . .
(Canada) . . . .
(Air) (Canada)
(Export) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4110584-001
4110585-001
4110584-002
4110585-002
. . . 4111226
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
* These items are part of Alarm Channel Assembly 4108592 (Early models)
4111522 (Later Models)
Rev. S
8-19
.
.
.
.
.
4106046
4106047
4103423
4106044
4106045
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
123
126
125
124
128
127
129
122
126
130 130
130 130
A
B
C
123
128
125
131
124
127
CSA
129
122
132
SV30911
130
B
130
C
130
130
A
8-20
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Cylinder Yoke Assembly, O2 . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2, Green (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
White (UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blue (Germany) . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Yoke Assembly, O2 (Canada) . . . .
Cylinder Yoke Assembly, N2O . . . . . . . . . .
Label, N2O, Blue (USA, UK, Canada) . . .
Gray (Germany) . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Yoke Assembly, Air . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Air, Yellow (USA, Germany) . . . .
Black/White (UK) . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Yoke Assembly, Air (Canada) . . .
Check Valve Assembly (Typ., All Yokes) .
Plug, Yoke (Typ., All Yokes) . . . . . . . . . .
Chain, Yoke Plug (Typ., All Yokes) . . . . .
Label, CO2, Gray (USA, UK) . . . . . . . . . .
Black (Germany) . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2-He, Green/Brown (USA) . . . . .
White/Brown (Canada) . . . .
Screw, Yoke Mounting (2x Per Yoke) . . . .
Lockwasher, Yoke Mounting (2x Per Yoke)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 1101640
. . . 1101768
. . . 4103890
4111266-001
. . . 4109943
. . . 1101641
. . . 1101619
4111266-003
. . . 1101645
. . . 4102742
. . . 4103826
. . . 4109944
. . . 4111792
. . . 1101655
. . . 4101868
. . . 1101639
4111266-005
. . . 4110950
. . . 4110942
. . HW01058
. . HW65005
Regulator, O2 Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulator, N2O Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulator, O2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . . .
Regulator, N2O Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . .
Regulator, He/Air/N2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada)
Regulator, CO2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . .
Setscrew, Regulator Mounting (2x Per Regulator)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4108744
. . . 4101867
4110792-006
. . . 4103249
. . . 4103178
. . . 4105981
4111266-002
. . HW04020
4110792-021
O2 Flush Valve & Fitting Assembly
Restrictor, O2 Flush Valve . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Button, O2 FLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . .
130A Label,
Dot, O2, Green (USA) . . .
White (UK, Canada)
Blue (Germany) . . . .
130B Set Screw, 3-48 x 3/16 (2x) . . . . . .
130C Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
131
132
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4103797
. 4103798
. 4110656
. 4110655
. 4110658
. 4110657
HW10001
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, O2 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110163
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, N2O (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110161
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, 3rd Gas (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110162
8-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
L
L
NM3
133
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XX XXXX
134
135
136
157
B
157
A
137
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
138
144
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXX
139
145
143
146
140
147
148
141
155
142
150
149
151
156
152
153
157
154
SV30056
8-22
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
133
Interface Panel Assembly, Nellcor Pulse Oximeter (Incl. Cable to Module) 4109118
(Interface Panel Assembly for Novametrix Pulse Oximeter
is supplied with P/N 4114972)
134
135
Interface Panel Assembly, Sample Line (Incl. Tubing to Analyzer) . . . . . . 4109915
Interface Panel Assembly, Sphygmomed (Incl. Tubing to Module) . . . . . . . 4109057
136
Reservoir, Auxiliary Water Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110616
137
138
139
140
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
141
AC Power Cord Assembly (120V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109164
142
Power Supply Assembly (Transformer) 220/240V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111036
143
144
145
146
147
148
Power Supply Assembly, Secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Multispec Power Supply Mounting (3x) . . . . . . .
Power Controller Sub-Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Power Controller Sub-Assembly Mounting (4x) .
Washer, Power Controller Sub-Assembly Mounting (4x)
149
150
151
Power Supply Assembly, Primary . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Bottom and Mounting, Power Supply
Screw, Power Supply Bracket Side (3x) . . . .
Battery Pack Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange part number . . . . . .
Screw, Battery Pack Mounting (4x) . . . . . . .
152
153
154
155
156
157
Panel
Panel
Panel
Panel
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
O2MED (Incl. Cable to Monitor) . . . .
SPIROMED (Incl. Cable to Monitor)
BAROMED (Incl. Tubing to Monitor)
Exhaust (Incl. Tubing to Analyzer) .
Caster W/Brake (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Old Part Nunber: 4109382)
Caster W/O Brake (2x) . . . . . . . . . .
(Old Part Number: 4109383)
Setscrew, Caster (4x) . . . . . . . . . . .
Hole Plug, Setscrew (4x) . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4108825
4108960
4108996
4108147
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109093
. 4109912
HW09000
. 4109092
HW01014
HW67000
..........
..........
Bracket (8x)
..........
..........
..........
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4109135
. . 4109476
. HW09008
. HW03005
. . 4109115
SE4109115
. HW09008
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111849
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111850
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW04017
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102729
157A Absorber Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101724
157B Wing Screw, -16 x 1 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100078
Rev. N
8-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
160
A
160
NM3
SV30912
159
159
A
161
161
162
A
163
158
159
B
159
C
EXPIRATION
179
A
164
PEEP
OFF
ON
PEEP
PRESS
PEEP ON
180
A
NSPIRATIO
163
CAUTION:
165
BEFORE USE
209 OR 181
166
REF
167
REF
180
B
BEFORE USE
168
180
169
179
170
178
171
172
177
173
176
174
175
8-24
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
158
159
159A
159B
159C
160
160A
161
162
162A
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
179A
180
180A
180B
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Inspiratory Valve Assembly (incl. O2 sensor mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ref: Valve w/o O2 sensor mount (old no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug Assembly, Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome & Label, Insp. Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Asm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expiratory Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Valve Dome (Both Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk (Both Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Valve Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spiromed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Canister Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen, Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canister Assembly (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rod, Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clip, E-Ring (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Sub-Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, -16 SS (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Bar (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dowel Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose Assembly, Fresh Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rod, Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Disconnect Fitting (Breathing Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEEP Bypass and Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #126 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge Assembly, Breathing Pressure
(Includes Mounting Ring and O-Ring)
Later design gauge assembly with additional scale in hPa . . . . . . .
O-Ring, #117, Silicone (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4107649
. . 2122810
. . 4112773
. . 4106387
. . 4108329
. . 4112151
. . 1100559
. . 2122812
. . 2109230
. . 2109231
. . 2123249
. . 1100565
. . 1101690
. . 4106362
. . 4105848
. . 1100022
. . 4105851
. . 1101356
. . 1100097
4110975-010
. . . 4108358
. . HW50010
. . . 1101018
. . . 1101015
. . . 1101017
. . . 4108577
. . . 4106874
. . . 4102940
. . . 1101355
. . . 4108139
. . . 4111527
. . . 4114419
. . . 4111878
. . . 4113558
. . . . . . . . . . 4105853
. . . . . . . . . . 4115275
. . . . . . . . . . 4105766
Breathing press hose asm (quick disc. ftg on each end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109368
Breathing press hose asm (quick disc. ftg one end, Luer fitting other end) . . . . . . 4108528
O2 Sensor: Complete Assembly, including capsule
Sensor Capsule: old number:. . . . . 6803290 . . . .
Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter (cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #025 (viton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #016 (viton) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. T
8-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
new
....
....
....
....
......
number:
......
......
......
......
4110374
6850645
4106363
4106385
4105791
4106388
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
181
182
184 185
197
183
196
195
192
187
202
201
198
188
186
190
191
193
200
203
199
189
208
194
195
A
195
B
207
192
A
206
205
204
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
FLANGE
SV30915
8-26
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
181
Valve, Man/Auto Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102698
182
APL Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104839
183
Fiber Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplied with APL Valve
184
Screw, Selector Valve Mounting 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . HW01013
185
Lock Washer, Selector Valve Mounting, #8 int-t (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67000
186
O-Ring, Neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102941
187
Screw, Adapter Flange Mounting 8-32 x ½ in. (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01014
188
Adapter Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102694
189
O-Ring, Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105767
190
Valve Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102734
191
Valve Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102692
192
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110975 P-005
192A
Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102700
193
Dowel Pin, 0.187 x ¾ in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW76002
194
Dowel Pin, 0.250 x
in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW76003
195
Valve Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102690
195A
Label, Bag/Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102699
195B
Label, Dot NAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101098
196
Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101011
197
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4101848
198
Ball Bearing (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11011637
199
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103118
200
Valve Switch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102691
201
Screw, Adjustment, ¼-28 x ¼ in. (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW04014
202
Screw, Valve Switch Block Mounting, Upper, 8-32 x ¼ in. (2x) . . . . . . . HW01019
203
Screw, Valve Switch Block Mounting, Lower, 8-32 x ½ in. (2x) . . . . . . . HW01020
204
Bag Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102894
205
Swivel Bag Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101334
206
Screw, Bag Mount, 8-32 x
in. (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW02015
207
O-Ring, Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105868
208
Glide Ring, Teflon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101335
SpO2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108983
Rev. G
8-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
210
SV30061
215
211
219
216
220
218
217
221
222
209
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
FLANGE
223
229
224
213
212
228
225
226
214
227
8-28
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Valve, Man/Auto Selector (later design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112217-001
APL Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104839
Fiber Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Supplied with APL Valve)
Screw, Selector Valve Mounting, 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . HW01013
Lock Washer, Selector Valve Mounting, #8 int-t (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67000
O-Ring, Neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102941
Label, "Scavenger Hose" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104806
Screw, 5/16-18 x 3¾ in. Rd Hd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW06023
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110792-070
Screw, 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01013
Lock Washer, #8 split (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW65011
Connector Assembly, 22mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106744
Label, "Ventilator Hose" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100563
O-Ring, #117 Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105766
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110792-071
O-Ring, #120 EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112629-001
Nut, 5/16-18 Hexseal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112613-001
Hole Plug, 3/16 in. dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111663-001
Bag Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102894
Label, "Breathing Bag" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100561
Bag Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112622-001
SpO2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108983
Rev. K
8-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
230
NM3
AUXILIARY O2 FLOW METER, NEW STYLE
238
239
240
237
241
242
236
243
234
244
231
235
232
245
233
248
249
247
257
AUXILIARY O2 FLOW METER, OLD STYLE
246
258
253
252
259
250
255
251
254
256
260
SV45012
261
8-30
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
246
247
248
Auxiliary O2 Flow Meter Assembly, new style . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, cup point, 6-32 x ¼ in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 6-32 x ¼ in., btn hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, cup point, 10-32 x
(2x) (used as mtg stud)
Label, AUXILIARY OXYGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label,
w/dot and green & white rings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter (incl. tube & valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ell,
hose x
MPT (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x 1 1/16 in. btn hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose, 0.13 in. I.D., 4.63 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ell, 1/16 hose x 8-32M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press-on hose clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose, 0.075 in. I.D., 7 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press-on hose clamp (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2 tubing (2x) (not shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock washer,
int-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel nut, -32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulkhead & hose barb asm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109310
HW04003
. 4111442
HW09004
HW04011
. 4109381
. 4109373
. 4111460
. 4111053
. 4111445
HW09043
ML08007
. 4110173
. 4104161
ML08003
. 4111495
. 4109871
. 4111444
. 4111443
. 4111440
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
Auxiliary O2 Flow Meter Assembly, old style
Mounting block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter (incl. knob, tube & valve) . . . .
Label, AUXILIARY OXYGEN . . . . . . . . .
Set screw, cup point, 10-32 x ¼ in. . . . . .
Label,
w/dot and green & white rings .
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb ftg, 10-32 x 1/16 hose . . . . . . .
O-ring, #12 (neoprene) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #009 (viton) (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x 5/16 in. btn hd (2x) . . . . . .
Ell, 3/16 hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109391
. 4109389
. 4109384
. 4109381
HW04009
. 4109373
. 4102165
. 4103445
. 1101523
. 4109331
. 4105962
HW09016
. 4109387
Rev. F
8-31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
288
289
NM3
290
291
292
293
287
294
295
286
296
297
285
298
264
263
262
265
299
266
300
277
267
276
268
269
278
279
280
281
275
274
273
282
272
270
284
283
SV50545
271
8-32
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
Rev. G
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Open Reservoir Scavenger Assembly . . . . .
Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow,
M x ¼ in. hose . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cap, Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body, DISS VAC x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, DISS VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose Barb Nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 mm Connector (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, ¼-20 x
in. skt hd (2x) . . . . . . .
Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring #112 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain, 8¼ lg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring #008 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, ACTIVATE HOSPITAL VACUUM
Retaining Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, Valve Stem Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Nut, -24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x) . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x ¾ in. skt hd (4x) . . . . . . .
O-ring #019 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #015 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #019 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #013 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x ½ in. skt hd (2x)
Lock Washer, #10 split (2x) . . .
Flat Washer, #10 (2x) . . . . . . . .
Screw, ¼-20 x ½ in. skt hd (2x) .
Lock Washer, ¼ int-t (2x) . . . . .
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 (neoprene) . . . . . .
Flowmeter Housing . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #012 (neoprene) . . . . . .
Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 6-32 x
in. flat hd (2x) .
Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x
in. btn hd (4x)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4107624
. . . 4109314
. . . 4106881
. . . 4110045
. . . 4103669
. . . 4103122
. . . 4103123
. . . 4109315
. . HW01033
. . . 4110982
. . . 4104294
. . . 4110979
. . . 4102141
4112495-005
. . . 4102140
. . . 4102022
. . . 4109305
. . . 4110997
. . . 4109316
. . . 4112137
. . . 4105699
. . . 4112138
. . . 4104806
. . HW01028
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4106458
. 4104602
. 4106458
. 4102234
. 4106231
HW01025
HW65003
HW66003
HW01034
HW67005
. 4111002
. 4102022
. 4110980
. 1101523
. 4112289
HW05006
. 4110999
. 4111000
HW09005
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
313
316
314
312
315
311
317
306
305
304
318
307
308
310
319
309
303
323
322
301
324
325
326
327
321
302
328
320
SV00292
8-34
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
Rev. H
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Open Reservoir Scavenger Assembly, old style
Reservoir Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, CAUTION... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, ¼-20 x ¾ in. (2x) . . . . . . .
Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, flat hd, 8-32 x ¾ in. (2x) . . . . . . . . . .
DISS body x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISS nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tube, 1 in. dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tube, ¾ in. dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, btn hd, 10-32 x
in. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #016 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #010 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, 6-32 x
in. . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, 6-32 x ¼ in. . . . . . . . . . . .
Top, Scavenger Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector, 19 mm (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, ACTIVATE HOSPITAL VACUUM . . .
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, valve stem retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock nut, -24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-35
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109321
. 4109320
. 4104294
HW01036
. 4109314
HW03026
. 4103669
. 4103122
. 4103123
. 4109312
. 4109311
HW09005
. 4109322
. 4101872
. 4109309
. 4102022
HW01067
. 4109306
HW01007
. 4109307
. 4109315
. 4102098
. 4109589
. 4109305
. 4102022
. 4109316
. 4102068
. 4105990
. 4105699
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
334
335
333
336
332
337
331
338
330
339
329
340
343
342
344
345
341
SV00179
8-36
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
Scavenger, A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain assembly, 8¼ in. . . . . . . .
Screw, round hd, 10-32 x ½ in. .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #112 neoprene . . . . . . .
Dust cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve ’A’ 5 cm H2O . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #027 neoprene . . . . . . .
Body, solder assembly . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x)
Label, EXHAUST . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4106161
4112495-006
. . HW06007
. . . 4102140
. . . 4102141
. . . 1101527
4110792-007
. . . 2207032
. . . 4101871
. . . 4102105
. . . 4104806
. . . 4106878
341
342
343
344
345
Vent Grill Adapter (for 19 mm hose)
Screw, round hd, 10-24 x 3 in. (2x)
Toggle nut (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE . . . . .
Adapter assembly, 19 mm . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1101312
HW06012
. 4101862
. 4104806
. 1101609
Hose Barb Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108114
Rev. H
8-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM3
SV00293
362
363
361
359
364
360
358
365
366
367
368
369
357
356
370
355
354
346
353
352
351
349
350
8-38
348
347
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM3
ITEM
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
Rev. H
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . .
Label, RESERVOIR BAG . . . . .
DISS nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bead Chain, 8¼ in. . . . . . . . . . .
Chain coupling (2x) . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, round hd, 10-32 x ½ in. .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #112 neoprene . . . . . . .
Cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 1.8 cm H2O . . . . . . . .
Housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seal, ’A’ valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 0.5 cm H2O . . . . . . . .
Dust cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tube assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #215 neoprene . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 5 cm H2O . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x)
PART NUMBER
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-39
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4102088
. . . 4105699
. . . 4105990
. . . 4102068
. . . 4102022
. . . 4106879
. . . 4103122
. . . 4103123
. . . 4103940
. . . 4101868
. . HW06007
. . . 4102140
. . . 4102141
. . . 4104659
. . . 2116219
. . . 4104755
. . . 4106255
. . . 4106321
. . . 7264277
. . . 4102036
. . . 4102030
. . . 4102038
. . . 2207032
4110792-007
. . . 4102035
. . . 4104806
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Narkomed 3 Service Manual
Rev. V summary of changes
Page
Description
6-1 thru 6-62 . . . . . . . . Entire section revised to reflect PMC nomenclature
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
DrägerService is a division of
Draeger Medical, Inc.
3122 Commerce Drive
Telford, PA 18969
Tel: (215) 721-5402
(800) 543-5047
Fax: (215) 721-5784
Web: www.draegermedical.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement